Mercurial > emacs
annotate doc/misc/cc-mode.texi @ 87864:54863df609a3
(vc-svn-registered): Make it work for non-existent
files.
| author | Dan Nicolaescu <dann@ics.uci.edu> |
|---|---|
| date | Sun, 20 Jan 2008 19:56:43 +0000 |
| parents | cdd30283527d |
| children | 5d58981e6690 56a72e2bd635 |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 84286 | 1 \input texinfo |
| 2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling: | |
| 3 @c | |
| 4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them. | |
| 5 @c | |
| 6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in | |
| 7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives | |
| 8 @c are significant. | |
| 9 | |
| 10 @c Conventions for formatting examples: | |
| 11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty | |
| 12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise. | |
| 13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where | |
| 14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant. | |
| 15 @c o Format line number columns like this: | |
| 16 @c 1: foo | |
| 17 @c 2: bar | |
| 18 @c ^ one space | |
| 19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment | |
| 20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer | |
| 21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented. | |
| 22 | |
| 23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring? | |
| 24 | |
| 25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region) | |
| 27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 28 | |
| 29 | |
| 30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 31 @comment How to make the various output formats: | |
| 32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.) | |
| 33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed. | |
| 34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 35 @ignore | |
| 36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a | |
| 37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals, | |
| 38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals. | |
| 39 ## Info output | |
| 40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi | |
| 41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 42 | |
| 43 ## DVI output | |
| 44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so | |
| 45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex | |
| 46 ## manpage. | |
| 47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi | |
| 48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi | |
| 49 | |
| 50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional) | |
| 51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi | |
| 52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 53 | |
| 54 ## Plain text output | |
| 55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi | |
| 57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 59 | |
| 60 ## DocBook output | |
| 61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 62 cc-mode.texi | |
| 63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 65 | |
| 66 ## XML output | |
| 67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 68 cc-mode.texi | |
| 69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 71 | |
| 72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.) | |
| 73 | |
| 74 ## View DVI output | |
| 75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi & | |
| 76 | |
| 77 ## View HTML output | |
| 78 mozilla cc-mode.html | |
| 79 @end ignore | |
| 80 | |
| 81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file. | |
| 82 @finalout | |
| 83 | |
|
84329
3d431f1997d8
(setfilename): Go up one more level to ../../info.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
84286
diff
changeset
|
84 @setfilename ../../info/ccmode |
| 84286 | 85 @settitle CC Mode Manual |
| 86 @footnotestyle end | |
| 87 | |
| 88 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the | |
| 89 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the | |
| 90 @c Texinfo variable `XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it | |
| 91 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g. with | |
| 92 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi". | |
| 93 @ifset XEMACS | |
| 94 @macro emacsman | |
| 95 xemacs | |
| 96 @end macro | |
| 97 @macro emacsmantitle | |
| 98 XEmacs User's Manual | |
| 99 @end macro | |
| 100 @macro lispref | |
| 101 lispref | |
| 102 @end macro | |
| 103 @macro lispreftitle | |
| 104 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual | |
| 105 @end macro | |
| 106 @end ifset | |
| 107 | |
| 108 @ifclear XEMACS | |
| 109 @macro emacsman | |
| 110 emacs | |
| 111 @end macro | |
| 112 @macro emacsmantitle | |
| 113 GNU Emacs Manual | |
| 114 @end macro | |
| 115 @macro lispref | |
| 116 elisp | |
| 117 @end macro | |
| 118 @macro lispreftitle | |
| 119 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual | |
| 120 @end macro | |
| 121 @end ifclear | |
| 122 | |
| 123 | |
| 124 @macro ccmode | |
| 125 CC Mode | |
| 126 @end macro | |
| 127 | |
| 128 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 129 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !! | |
| 130 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region) | |
| 131 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 132 | |
| 133 | |
| 134 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 135 @comment | |
| 136 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode | |
| 137 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola | |
| 138 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu> | |
| 139 @comment | |
| 140 @comment Authors: | |
| 141 @comment Barry A. Warsaw | |
| 142 @comment Martin Stjernholm | |
| 143 @comment Alan Mackenzie | |
| 144 @comment | |
| 145 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org> | |
| 146 @comment | |
| 147 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 148 | |
| 149 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols. | |
| 150 @ifnottex @c In texi2dvi, the @defindex would create an empty cc-mode.ss | |
| 151 @c For Info, unlike tex, @syncodeindex needs a matching @defindex. | |
| 152 @defindex ss | |
| 153 @end ifnottex | |
| 154 | |
| 155 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one. | |
| 156 @syncodeindex ss cp | |
| 157 @syncodeindex ky cp | |
| 158 | |
| 159 @copying | |
| 160 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs. | |
| 161 | |
| 162 Copyright @copyright{} 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, | |
| 163 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
| 164 | |
| 165 @quotation | |
| 166 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document | |
| 167 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or | |
| 168 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the | |
| 169 Invariant Sections being ``The GNU Manifesto'', ``Distribution'' and | |
| 170 ``GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE'', with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU | |
| 171 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the | |
| 172 license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation | |
| 173 License'' in the Emacs manual. | |
| 174 | |
| 175 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify | |
| 176 this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free | |
| 177 Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.'' | |
| 178 | |
| 179 This document is part of a collection distributed under the GNU Free | |
| 180 Documentation License. If you want to distribute this document | |
| 181 separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the | |
| 182 license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license. | |
| 183 @end quotation | |
| 184 @end copying | |
| 185 | |
| 186 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation | |
| 187 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks. | |
| 188 @dircategory Emacs | |
| 189 @direntry | |
| 190 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C, | |
| 191 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code. | |
| 192 @end direntry | |
| 193 | |
| 194 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 195 @comment TeX title page | |
| 196 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 197 | |
| 198 @titlepage | |
| 199 @sp 10 | |
| 200 | |
| 201 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.31} | |
| 202 @sp 2 | |
| 203 @center @subtitlefont{A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages} | |
| 204 @sp 2 | |
| 205 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie | |
| 206 | |
| 207 @page | |
| 208 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll | |
| 209 @insertcopying | |
| 210 | |
|
85173
de920bbb6866
Remove RCS keywords from doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
84329
diff
changeset
|
211 This manual was generated from cc-mode.texi, which can be downloaded |
|
de920bbb6866
Remove RCS keywords from doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
84329
diff
changeset
|
212 from |
|
84329
3d431f1997d8
(setfilename): Go up one more level to ../../info.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
84286
diff
changeset
|
213 @url{http://cvs.savannah.gnu.org/viewcvs/emacs/emacs/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi}. |
| 84286 | 214 @end titlepage |
| 215 | |
| 216 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 217 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file. | |
| 218 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual. | |
| 219 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 220 | |
| 221 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir) | |
| 222 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 223 | |
| 224 @ifinfo | |
| 225 @top @ccmode{} | |
| 226 | |
| 227 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++, | |
| 228 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike | |
| 229 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and | |
| 230 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing | |
| 231 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between | |
| 232 functions, classes etc - there are other packages for that. | |
| 233 @end ifinfo | |
| 234 | |
| 235 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 236 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 237 | |
| 238 @menu | |
| 239 * Introduction:: | |
| 240 * Overview:: | |
| 241 * Getting Started:: | |
| 242 * Commands:: | |
| 243 * Font Locking:: | |
| 244 * Config Basics:: | |
| 245 * Custom Filling and Breaking:: | |
| 246 * Custom Auto-newlines:: | |
| 247 * Clean-ups:: | |
| 248 * Indentation Engine Basics:: | |
| 249 * Customizing Indentation:: | |
| 250 * Custom Macros:: | |
| 251 * Odds and Ends:: | |
| 252 * Sample .emacs File:: | |
| 253 * Performance Issues:: | |
| 254 * Limitations and Known Bugs:: | |
| 255 * FAQ:: | |
| 256 * Updating CC Mode:: | |
| 257 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports:: | |
| 258 * GNU Free Documentation License:: | |
| 259 * Command and Function Index:: | |
| 260 * Variable Index:: | |
| 261 * Concept and Key Index:: | |
| 262 | |
| 263 @detailmenu | |
| 264 --- The Detailed Node Listing --- | |
| 265 | |
| 266 Commands | |
| 267 | |
| 268 * Indentation Commands:: | |
| 269 * Comment Commands:: | |
| 270 * Movement Commands:: | |
| 271 * Filling and Breaking:: | |
| 272 * Minor Modes:: | |
| 273 * Electric Keys:: | |
| 274 * Auto-newlines:: | |
| 275 * Hungry WS Deletion:: | |
| 276 * Subword Movement:: | |
| 277 * Other Commands:: | |
| 278 | |
| 279 Font Locking | |
| 280 | |
| 281 * Font Locking Preliminaries:: | |
| 282 * Faces:: | |
| 283 * Doc Comments:: | |
| 284 * AWK Mode Font Locking:: | |
| 285 | |
| 286 Configuration Basics | |
| 287 | |
| 288 * CC Hooks:: | |
| 289 * Style Variables:: | |
| 290 * Styles:: | |
| 291 | |
| 292 Styles | |
| 293 | |
| 294 * Built-in Styles:: | |
| 295 * Choosing a Style:: | |
| 296 * Adding Styles:: | |
| 297 * File Styles:: | |
| 298 | |
| 299 Customizing Auto-newlines | |
| 300 | |
| 301 * Hanging Braces:: | |
| 302 * Hanging Colons:: | |
| 303 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas:: | |
| 304 | |
| 305 Hanging Braces | |
| 306 | |
| 307 * Custom Braces:: | |
| 308 | |
| 309 Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 310 | |
| 311 * Syntactic Analysis:: | |
| 312 * Syntactic Symbols:: | |
| 313 * Indentation Calculation:: | |
| 314 | |
| 315 Syntactic Symbols | |
| 316 | |
| 317 * Function Symbols:: | |
| 318 * Class Symbols:: | |
| 319 * Conditional Construct Symbols:: | |
| 320 * Switch Statement Symbols:: | |
| 321 * Brace List Symbols:: | |
| 322 * External Scope Symbols:: | |
| 323 * Paren List Symbols:: | |
| 324 * Literal Symbols:: | |
| 325 * Multiline Macro Symbols:: | |
| 326 * Objective-C Method Symbols:: | |
| 327 * Anonymous Class Symbol:: | |
| 328 * Statement Block Symbols:: | |
| 329 * K&R Symbols:: | |
| 330 | |
| 331 Customizing Indentation | |
| 332 | |
| 333 * c-offsets-alist:: | |
| 334 * Interactive Customization:: | |
| 335 * Line-Up Functions:: | |
| 336 * Custom Line-Up:: | |
| 337 * Other Indentation:: | |
| 338 | |
| 339 Line-Up Functions | |
| 340 | |
| 341 * Brace/Paren Line-Up:: | |
| 342 * List Line-Up:: | |
| 343 * Operator Line-Up:: | |
| 344 * Comment Line-Up:: | |
| 345 * Misc Line-Up:: | |
| 346 | |
| 347 @end detailmenu | |
| 348 @end menu | |
| 349 | |
| 350 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 351 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top | |
| 352 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 353 @chapter Introduction | |
| 354 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 355 | |
| 356 @cindex BOCM | |
| 357 @cindex history | |
| 358 @cindex awk-mode.el | |
| 359 @cindex c-mode.el | |
| 360 @cindex c++-mode.el | |
| 361 | |
| 362 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, | |
| 363 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and | |
| 364 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended | |
| 365 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM | |
| 366 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been | |
| 367 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode | |
| 368 in the (X)Emacs base. | |
| 369 | |
| 370 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{} | |
| 371 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin | |
| 372 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the | |
| 373 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not | |
| 374 originally contain the font lock support for its languages --- that | |
| 375 was added in version 5.30. | |
| 376 | |
| 377 This manual describes @ccmode{} | |
| 378 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the | |
| 379 version 5.31. | |
| 380 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically | |
| 381 | |
| 382 @ccmode{} supports the editing of K&R and ANSI C, C++, Objective-C, | |
| 383 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like | |
| 384 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD | |
| 385 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this | |
| 386 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for | |
| 387 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as | |
| 388 uniformly integrated as the other languages. | |
| 389 | |
| 390 @findex c-mode | |
| 391 @findex c++-mode | |
| 392 @findex objc-mode | |
| 393 @findex java-mode | |
| 394 @findex idl-mode | |
| 395 @findex pike-mode | |
| 396 @findex awk-mode | |
| 397 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top | |
| 398 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and | |
| 399 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and | |
| 400 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode}, | |
| 401 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are | |
| 402 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for | |
| 403 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}. | |
| 404 | |
| 405 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in | |
| 406 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd | |
| 407 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously | |
| 408 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development. | |
| 409 | |
| 410 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 411 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top | |
| 412 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual | |
| 413 @chapter Overview of the Manual | |
| 414 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 415 | |
| 416 @noindent | |
| 417 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this | |
| 418 one). | |
| 419 | |
| 420 @noindent | |
| 421 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of | |
| 422 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it). | |
| 423 | |
| 424 @itemize @bullet | |
| 425 @item | |
| 426 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all | |
| 427 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from | |
| 428 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you | |
| 429 how to customize these features. | |
| 430 | |
| 431 @item | |
| 432 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to | |
| 433 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped | |
| 434 over at a first reading. | |
| 435 @end itemize | |
| 436 | |
| 437 @noindent | |
| 438 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize} | |
| 439 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter | |
| 440 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in | |
| 441 increasing detail. | |
| 442 | |
| 443 @itemize @bullet | |
| 444 @item | |
| 445 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write | |
| 446 customizations - whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither, | |
| 447 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and | |
| 448 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies. | |
| 449 | |
| 450 @item | |
| 451 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various | |
| 452 features of @ccmode{}. | |
| 453 | |
| 454 @item | |
| 455 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you | |
| 456 in creating your own customization. | |
| 457 @end itemize | |
| 458 | |
| 459 @noindent | |
| 460 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly | |
| 461 into any of the previous chunks. | |
| 462 | |
| 463 @itemize @bullet | |
| 464 @item | |
| 465 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known | |
| 466 bugs/limitations. | |
| 467 | |
| 468 @item | |
| 469 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions. | |
| 470 | |
| 471 @item | |
| 472 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{} | |
| 473 project - whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports. | |
| 474 @end itemize | |
| 475 | |
| 476 @noindent | |
| 477 Finally, there are the customary indices. | |
| 478 | |
| 479 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 480 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top | |
| 481 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 482 @chapter Getting Started | |
| 483 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 484 | |
| 485 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should | |
| 486 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not | |
| 487 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy | |
| 488 (see below). | |
| 489 | |
| 87453 | 490 You should probably start by skimming through the entire Commands chapter |
| 491 (@pxref{Commands}) to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities. | |
| 84286 | 492 |
| 493 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of | |
| 494 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to | |
| 495 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often | |
| 496 want to change: | |
| 497 | |
| 498 @table @asis | |
| 499 @item c-basic-offset | |
| 500 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{} | |
| 501 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize | |
| 502 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 503 | |
| 504 @example | |
| 505 (setq c-basic-offset 6) | |
| 506 @end example | |
| 507 | |
| 508 @item The (indentation) style | |
| 509 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default, | |
| 510 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of | |
| 511 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in | |
| 512 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{} | |
| 513 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in | |
| 514 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either | |
| 515 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 516 | |
| 517 @example | |
| 518 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java") | |
| 519 (awk-mode . "awk") | |
| 520 (other . "linux"))) | |
| 521 @end example | |
| 522 | |
| 523 @item Electric Indentation | |
| 524 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or | |
| 525 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can | |
| 526 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric | |
| 527 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same | |
| 528 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by | |
| 529 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There | |
| 530 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}: | |
| 531 | |
| 532 @example | |
| 533 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil) | |
| 534 @end example | |
| 535 | |
| 536 @noindent | |
| 537 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the | |
| 538 section @ref{Minor Modes}. | |
| 539 | |
| 540 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line | |
| 541 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you | |
| 542 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that | |
| 543 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet | |
| 544 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has | |
| 545 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 546 | |
| 547 @example | |
| 548 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent () | |
| 549 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)) | |
| 550 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent) | |
| 551 @end example | |
| 552 | |
| 553 @noindent | |
| 554 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and | |
| 555 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described | |
| 556 in @ref{CC Hooks}. | |
| 557 @end table | |
| 558 | |
| 559 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before} | |
| 560 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of | |
| 561 @code{desktop-read}. | |
| 562 | |
| 563 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more | |
| 564 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start | |
| 565 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}. | |
| 566 | |
| 567 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see | |
| 568 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if | |
| 569 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to | |
| 570 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete | |
| 571 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs. | |
| 572 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See | |
| 573 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net} | |
| 574 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility | |
| 575 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}). | |
| 576 | |
| 577 @deffn Command c-version | |
| 578 @findex version (c-) | |
| 579 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C | |
| 580 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in | |
| 581 the echo area: | |
| 582 | |
| 583 @example | |
| 584 Using CC Mode version 5.XX | |
| 585 @end example | |
| 586 | |
| 587 @noindent | |
| 588 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number. | |
| 589 @end deffn | |
| 590 | |
| 591 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 592 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top | |
| 593 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 594 @chapter Commands | |
| 595 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 596 | |
| 597 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains | |
| 598 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as | |
| 599 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both | |
| 600 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters | |
| 601 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the | |
| 602 buffer, also do other things. | |
| 603 | |
| 604 You might well want to review | |
| 605 @ifset XEMACS | |
| 606 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}, | |
| 607 @end ifset | |
| 608 @ifclear XEMACS | |
| 609 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}, | |
| 610 @end ifclear | |
| 611 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis | |
| 612 structures. | |
| 613 | |
| 614 | |
| 615 @menu | |
| 616 * Indentation Commands:: | |
| 617 * Comment Commands:: | |
| 618 * Movement Commands:: | |
| 619 * Filling and Breaking:: | |
| 620 * Minor Modes:: | |
| 621 * Electric Keys:: | |
| 622 * Auto-newlines:: | |
| 623 * Hungry WS Deletion:: | |
| 624 * Subword Movement:: | |
| 625 * Other Commands:: | |
| 626 @end menu | |
| 627 | |
| 628 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 629 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands | |
| 630 @comment node-name, next, previous,up | |
| 631 @section Indentation Commands | |
| 632 @cindex indentation | |
| 633 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 634 | |
| 635 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you | |
| 636 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other | |
| 637 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You | |
| 638 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects | |
| 639 of your changes. | |
| 640 | |
| 641 @cindex GNU indent program | |
| 642 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list} | |
| 643 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is | |
| 644 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then | |
| 645 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this, | |
| 646 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent}, | |
| 647 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things. | |
| 648 | |
| 649 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other | |
| 650 code, i.e. they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the | |
| 651 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments. | |
| 652 | |
| 653 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed | |
| 654 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd | |
| 655 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no | |
| 656 hint about the syntactic context, i.e. whether the macro expands to an | |
| 657 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the | |
| 658 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it | |
| 659 out correctly most of the time, though. | |
| 660 | |
| 661 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When | |
| 662 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to | |
| 663 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region. | |
| 664 | |
| 665 These commands indent code: | |
| 666 | |
| 667 @table @asis | |
| 668 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command}) | |
| 669 @kindex TAB | |
| 670 @findex c-indent-command | |
| 671 @findex indent-command (c-) | |
| 672 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know | |
| 673 about it for normal use. | |
| 674 | |
| 675 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the | |
| 676 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine | |
| 677 Basics}): | |
| 678 | |
| 679 @itemize @bullet | |
| 680 @item | |
| 681 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents | |
| 682 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument | |
| 683 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire | |
| 684 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a | |
| 685 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.} | |
| 686 that begins at the line's left margin. | |
| 687 | |
| 688 @item | |
| 689 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra | |
| 690 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a | |
| 691 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1, | |
| 692 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation. | |
| 693 @end itemize | |
| 694 | |
| 695 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With | |
| 696 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace | |
| 697 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines | |
| 698 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard | |
| 699 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real | |
| 700 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if | |
| 701 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,, @emacsman{}, | |
| 702 @emacsmantitle{}}. | |
| 703 | |
| 704 @defopt c-tab-always-indent | |
| 705 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-) | |
| 706 @cindex literal | |
| 707 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates. | |
| 708 @itemize @bullet | |
| 709 @item | |
| 710 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the | |
| 711 current line. | |
| 712 @item | |
| 713 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is | |
| 714 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line. | |
| 715 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of | |
| 716 spaces - see below) at point. | |
| 717 @item | |
| 718 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point | |
| 719 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted. | |
| 720 @end itemize | |
| 721 @end defopt | |
| 722 | |
| 723 @defopt c-insert-tab-function | |
| 724 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-) | |
| 725 @findex tab-to-tab-stop | |
| 726 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually | |
| 727 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is | |
| 728 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab | |
| 729 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on | |
| 730 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set | |
| 731 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get | |
| 732 hard tab stops when indenting. | |
| 733 @end defopt | |
| 734 @end table | |
| 735 | |
| 736 @noindent | |
| 737 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the | |
| 738 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine | |
| 739 Basics}): | |
| 740 @itemize @bullet | |
| 741 @item | |
| 742 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines | |
| 743 according to their syntactic context; | |
| 744 @item | |
| 745 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as | |
| 746 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't | |
| 747 very useful in this case. | |
| 748 @end itemize | |
| 749 | |
| 750 @table @asis | |
| 751 @item @kbd{C-j} (@code{newline-and-indent}) | |
| 752 @kindex C-j | |
| 753 @findex newline-and-indent | |
| 754 Inserts a newline and indents the new blank line, ready to start | |
| 755 typing. This is a standard (X)Emacs command. | |
| 756 | |
| 757 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp}) | |
| 758 @kindex C-M-q | |
| 759 @findex c-indent-exp | |
| 760 @findex indent-exp (c-) | |
| 761 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that | |
| 762 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression | |
| 763 you want to indent. | |
| 764 | |
| 765 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun}) | |
| 766 @kindex C-c C-q | |
| 767 @findex c-indent-defun | |
| 768 @findex indent-defun (c-) | |
| 769 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition | |
| 770 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be | |
| 771 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or | |
| 772 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented | |
| 773 must be complete, i.e. it must have both a beginning brace and an ending | |
| 774 brace. | |
| 775 | |
| 776 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region}) | |
| 777 @kindex C-M-\ | |
| 778 @findex indent-region | |
| 779 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command, | |
| 780 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point | |
| 781 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent. | |
| 782 | |
| 783 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function}) | |
| 784 @kindex C-M-h | |
| 785 @findex c-mark-function | |
| 786 @findex mark-function (c-) | |
| 787 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking | |
| 788 the current top-level function or class definition as the current | |
| 789 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on | |
| 790 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method. | |
| 791 @end table | |
| 792 | |
| 793 These variables are also useful when indenting code: | |
| 794 | |
| 795 @defopt indent-tabs-mode | |
| 796 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation | |
| 797 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's | |
| 798 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used. | |
| 799 @end defopt | |
| 800 | |
| 801 @defopt c-progress-interval | |
| 802 @vindex progress-interval (c-) | |
| 803 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a | |
| 804 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to | |
| 805 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how | |
| 806 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed. | |
| 807 @end defopt | |
| 808 | |
| 809 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 810 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands | |
| 811 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 812 @section Comment Commands | |
| 813 @cindex comments (insertion of) | |
| 814 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 815 | |
| 816 @table @asis | |
| 817 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region}) | |
| 818 @kindex C-c C-c | |
| 819 @findex comment-region | |
| 820 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a | |
| 821 negative argument, it does the opposite - it deletes the comment | |
| 822 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU | |
| 823 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't | |
| 824 actually part of @ccmode{} - it is given a @ccmode{} binding for | |
| 825 convenience. | |
| 826 | |
| 827 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.}) | |
| 828 @kindex M-; | |
| 829 @findex comment-dwim | |
| 830 @findex indent-for-comment | |
| 831 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there | |
| 832 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column} | |
| 833 @ifclear XEMACS | |
| 834 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}) | |
| 835 @end ifclear | |
| 836 @ifset XEMACS | |
| 837 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}) | |
| 838 @end ifset | |
| 839 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the | |
| 840 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line, | |
| 841 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs | |
| 842 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables: | |
| 843 | |
| 844 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist | |
| 845 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-) | |
| 846 @vindex comment-column | |
| 847 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts | |
| 848 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and | |
| 849 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line. | |
| 850 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to | |
| 851 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type | |
| 852 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column | |
| 853 specified by @code{comment-column}. | |
| 854 | |
| 855 See the documentation string for a full description of this | |
| 856 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}). | |
| 857 @end defopt | |
| 858 | |
| 859 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p | |
| 860 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-) | |
| 861 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will | |
| 862 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist}, | |
| 863 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments. | |
| 864 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only | |
| 865 lines you can get that by setting | |
| 866 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}. | |
| 867 | |
| 868 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then | |
| 869 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only | |
| 870 lines. | |
| 871 @end defopt | |
| 872 @end table | |
| 873 | |
| 874 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 875 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands | |
| 876 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 877 @section Movement Commands | |
| 878 @cindex movement | |
| 879 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 880 | |
| 881 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code. | |
| 882 | |
| 883 @table @asis | |
| 884 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun}) | |
| 885 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun}) | |
| 886 @findex c-beginning-of-defun | |
| 887 @findex c-end-of-defun | |
| 888 | |
| 889 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other | |
| 890 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block | |
| 891 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you | |
| 892 can give these commands a repeat count. | |
| 893 | |
| 894 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is | |
| 895 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such | |
| 896 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two | |
| 897 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual | |
| 898 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to | |
| 899 move at all. | |
| 900 | |
| 901 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands | |
| 902 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they | |
| 903 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun | |
| 904 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{}, | |
| 905 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information. | |
| 906 | |
| 907 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun}) | |
| 908 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun}) | |
| 909 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode) | |
| 910 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode) | |
| 911 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun | |
| 912 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-) | |
| 913 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun | |
| 914 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-) | |
| 915 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These | |
| 916 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely | |
| 917 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}. | |
| 918 | |
| 919 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which | |
| 920 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and | |
| 921 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some | |
| 922 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode. | |
| 923 | |
| 924 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement}) | |
| 925 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement}) | |
| 926 @kindex M-a | |
| 927 @kindex M-e | |
| 928 @findex c-beginning-of-statement | |
| 929 @findex c-end-of-statement | |
| 930 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-) | |
| 931 @findex end-of-statement (c-) | |
| 932 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point | |
| 933 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement, | |
| 934 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or | |
| 935 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n} | |
| 936 means move over @var{n} statements. | |
| 937 | |
| 938 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more | |
| 939 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements. | |
| 940 | |
| 941 When called from a program, these functions take three optional | |
| 942 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the | |
| 943 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying | |
| 944 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline | |
| 945 strings. | |
| 946 | |
| 947 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional}) | |
| 948 @kindex C-c C-u | |
| 949 @findex c-up-conditional | |
| 950 @findex up-conditional (c-) | |
| 951 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark | |
| 952 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative | |
| 953 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor | |
| 954 conditional. | |
| 955 | |
| 956 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the | |
| 957 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going | |
| 958 forward. | |
| 959 | |
| 960 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have | |
| 961 preprocessor statements. | |
| 962 | |
| 963 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else} | |
| 964 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else | |
| 965 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-) | |
| 966 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else} | |
| 967 lines. Normally those lines are ignored. | |
| 968 | |
| 969 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional} | |
| 970 @findex c-down-conditional | |
| 971 @findex down-conditional (c-) | |
| 972 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving | |
| 973 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a | |
| 974 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor | |
| 975 conditional. | |
| 976 | |
| 977 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the | |
| 978 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward. | |
| 979 | |
| 980 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else} | |
| 981 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else | |
| 982 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-) | |
| 983 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else} | |
| 984 lines. Normally those lines are ignored. | |
| 985 | |
| 986 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional}) | |
| 987 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional}) | |
| 988 @kindex C-c C-p | |
| 989 @kindex C-c C-n | |
| 990 @findex c-backward-conditional | |
| 991 @findex c-forward-conditional | |
| 992 @findex backward-conditional (c-) | |
| 993 @findex forward-conditional (c-) | |
| 994 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving | |
| 995 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a | |
| 996 negative argument, move in the opposite direction. | |
| 997 | |
| 998 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have | |
| 999 preprocessor statements. | |
| 1000 | |
| 1001 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature} | |
| 1002 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature} | |
| 1003 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature | |
| 1004 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature | |
| 1005 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-) | |
| 1006 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-) | |
| 1007 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages | |
| 1008 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the | |
| 1009 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by | |
| 1010 underscores. E.g. @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}. | |
| 1011 | |
| 1012 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next | |
| 1013 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times. | |
| 1014 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction. | |
| 1015 | |
| 1016 Note that these two commands have been superseded by | |
| 1017 @code{c-subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword | |
| 1018 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}. | |
| 1019 @end table | |
| 1020 | |
| 1021 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1022 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands | |
| 1023 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1024 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands | |
| 1025 @cindex text filling | |
| 1026 @cindex line breaking | |
| 1027 @cindex comment handling | |
| 1028 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1029 | |
| 1030 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals, | |
| 1031 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal | |
| 1032 is to do it seamlessly, i.e. you can use auto fill mode, sentence and | |
| 1033 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc. wherever | |
| 1034 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it. | |
| 1035 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes, | |
| 1036 and so on. | |
| 1037 | |
| 1038 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and | |
| 1039 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and | |
| 1040 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have | |
| 1041 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother. | |
| 1042 | |
| 1043 @findex auto-fill-mode | |
| 1044 @cindex Auto Fill mode | |
| 1045 @cindex paragraph filling | |
| 1046 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of | |
| 1047 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto Fill,,, | |
| 1048 @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g. with | |
| 1049 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In | |
| 1050 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the | |
| 1051 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by | |
| 1052 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols} | |
| 1053 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}. | |
| 1054 | |
| 1055 @table @asis | |
| 1056 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph}) | |
| 1057 @kindex M-q | |
| 1058 @findex c-fill-paragraph | |
| 1059 @findex fill-paragraph (c-) | |
| 1060 @cindex Javadoc markup | |
| 1061 @cindex Pike autodoc markup | |
| 1062 This command fills multiline string literals and both block | |
| 1063 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words | |
| 1064 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc | |
| 1065 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode. | |
| 1066 | |
| 1067 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of | |
| 1068 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if | |
| 1069 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays | |
| 1070 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its | |
| 1071 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line. | |
| 1072 | |
| 1073 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{} | |
| 1074 buffers. | |
| 1075 | |
| 1076 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line}) | |
| 1077 @kindex M-j | |
| 1078 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line | |
| 1079 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-) | |
| 1080 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If | |
| 1081 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line | |
| 1082 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before | |
| 1083 the line break. It is the replacement for | |
| 1084 @code{indent-new-comment-line}. | |
| 1085 | |
| 1086 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break} | |
| 1087 @findex c-context-line-break | |
| 1088 @findex context-line-break (c-) | |
| 1089 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a | |
| 1090 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line | |
| 1091 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's | |
| 1092 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts | |
| 1093 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally | |
| 1094 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken. | |
| 1095 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a | |
| 1096 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a | |
| 1097 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are | |
| 1098 valid.}. | |
| 1099 | |
| 1100 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be | |
| 1101 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of | |
| 1102 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to | |
| 1103 this function. @xref{Sample .emacs File}. | |
| 1104 | |
| 1105 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line} | |
| 1106 @findex c-context-open-line | |
| 1107 @findex context-open-line (c-) | |
| 1108 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as | |
| 1109 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e. it works just like | |
| 1110 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted | |
| 1111 line break. | |
| 1112 @end table | |
| 1113 | |
| 1114 | |
| 1115 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1116 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands | |
| 1117 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1118 @section Minor Modes | |
| 1119 @cindex Minor Modes | |
| 1120 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1121 | |
| 1122 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might | |
| 1123 find useful while writing new code or editing old code: | |
| 1124 | |
| 1125 @table @asis | |
| 1126 @item electric mode | |
| 1127 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as | |
| 1128 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when | |
| 1129 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting, | |
| 1130 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}. | |
| 1131 @item auto-newline mode | |
| 1132 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type | |
| 1133 them yourself, e.g. after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed | |
| 1134 when electric mode is disabled. | |
| 1135 @item hungry-delete mode | |
| 1136 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single | |
| 1137 key - for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by | |
| 1138 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the | |
| 1139 last statement. | |
| 1140 @item subword mode | |
| 1141 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f} | |
| 1142 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the | |
| 1143 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words. | |
| 1144 E.g. @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS}, | |
| 1145 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}. | |
| 1146 @item syntactic-indentation mode | |
| 1147 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such | |
| 1148 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic | |
| 1149 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as | |
| 1150 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps | |
| 1151 of `c-basic-offset'. | |
| 1152 @end table | |
| 1153 | |
| 1154 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys}, | |
| 1155 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement}, | |
| 1156 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}. | |
| 1157 | |
| 1158 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can | |
| 1159 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favourite | |
| 1160 combination of them (@pxref{Sample .emacs File}). By default, when | |
| 1161 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode | |
| 1162 are enabled but the other two modes are disabled. | |
| 1163 | |
| 1164 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor | |
| 1165 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name, | |
| 1166 one letter for each enabled minor mode - @samp{l} for electric mode, | |
| 1167 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and | |
| 1168 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see | |
| 1169 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of | |
| 1170 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}. | |
| 1171 | |
| 1172 Here are the commands to toggle these modes: | |
| 1173 | |
| 1174 @table @asis | |
| 1175 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state}) | |
| 1176 @kindex C-c C-l | |
| 1177 @findex c-toggle-electric-state | |
| 1178 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-) | |
| 1179 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it | |
| 1180 also suppresses auto-newline mode. | |
| 1181 | |
| 1182 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline}) | |
| 1183 @kindex C-c C-a | |
| 1184 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline | |
| 1185 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-) | |
| 1186 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on, | |
| 1187 it also enables electric minor mode. | |
| 1188 | |
| 1189 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.} | |
| 1190 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state | |
| 1191 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-) | |
| 1192 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode. | |
| 1193 | |
| 1194 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.} | |
| 1195 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state | |
| 1196 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-) | |
| 1197 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes. | |
| 1198 | |
| 1199 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x c-subword-mode}) | |
| 1200 @kindex C-c C-w | |
| 1201 @findex c-subword-mode | |
| 1202 @findex subword-mode (c-) | |
| 1203 Toggle subword mode. | |
| 1204 | |
| 1205 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation} | |
| 1206 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation | |
| 1207 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-) | |
| 1208 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode. | |
| 1209 @end table | |
| 1210 | |
| 1211 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called | |
| 1212 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A | |
| 1213 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the | |
| 1214 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will | |
| 1215 turn it (or them) off. | |
| 1216 | |
| 1217 | |
| 1218 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1219 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands | |
| 1220 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1221 @section Electric Keys and Keywords | |
| 1222 @cindex electric characters | |
| 1223 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1224 | |
| 1225 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior - as well as | |
| 1226 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as | |
| 1227 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to | |
| 1228 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few | |
| 1229 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action. | |
| 1230 | |
|
86093
d223d695f3f3
(Electric Keys, Electric Keys, Custom Macros): Fix typos.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
85173
diff
changeset
|
1231 You can inhibit the electric behavior described here by disabling |
| 84286 | 1232 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}). |
| 1233 | |
| 1234 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when | |
| 1235 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string | |
| 1236 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when | |
| 1237 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it | |
| 1238 does by default). | |
| 1239 | |
| 1240 These keys and keywords are: | |
| 1241 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more | |
| 1242 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get | |
| 1243 @c fixed in the code sometime. | |
| 1244 | |
| 1245 @table @kbd | |
| 1246 @item # | |
| 1247 @kindex # | |
| 1248 @findex c-electric-pound | |
| 1249 @findex electric-pound (c-) | |
| 1250 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior | |
| 1251 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-) | |
| 1252 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the | |
| 1253 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro | |
| 1254 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior} | |
| 1255 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list | |
| 1256 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft}, | |
| 1257 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column | |
| 1258 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions. | |
| 1259 | |
| 1260 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment, | |
| 1261 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable | |
| 1262 character. | |
| 1263 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment | |
| 1264 @c reindentation. | |
| 1265 | |
| 1266 @item * | |
| 1267 @kindex * | |
| 1268 @itemx / | |
| 1269 @kindex / | |
| 1270 @findex c-electric-star | |
| 1271 @findex electric-star (c-) | |
| 1272 @findex c-electric-slash | |
| 1273 @findex electric-slash (c-) | |
| 1274 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash | |
| 1275 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the | |
| 1276 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a | |
| 1277 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the | |
| 1278 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e. there's only | |
| 1279 whitespace before it). | |
| 1280 | |
| 1281 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at | |
| 1282 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the | |
| 1283 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get | |
|
86093
d223d695f3f3
(Electric Keys, Electric Keys, Custom Macros): Fix typos.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
85173
diff
changeset
|
1284 this behavior. @xref{Clean-ups}. |
| 84286 | 1285 |
| 1286 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not | |
| 1287 electric. | |
| 1288 | |
| 1289 @item < | |
| 1290 @kindex < | |
| 1291 @itemx > | |
| 1292 @kindex > | |
| 1293 @findex c-electric-lt-gt | |
| 1294 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-) | |
| 1295 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is | |
| 1296 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++ | |
| 1297 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other | |
| 1298 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>} | |
| 1299 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line | |
| 1300 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not | |
| 1301 electric. | |
| 1302 | |
| 1303 @item ( | |
| 1304 @kindex ( | |
| 1305 @itemx ) | |
| 1306 @kindex ) | |
| 1307 @findex c-electric-paren | |
| 1308 @findex electric-paren (c-) | |
| 1309 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to | |
| 1310 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful | |
| 1311 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned | |
| 1312 automatically. | |
| 1313 | |
| 1314 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically | |
| 1315 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to | |
| 1316 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument | |
| 1317 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to | |
| 1318 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 1319 | |
| 1320 @item @{ | |
| 1321 @kindex @{ | |
| 1322 @itemx @} | |
| 1323 @kindex @} | |
| 1324 @findex c-electric-brace | |
| 1325 @findex electric-brace (c-) | |
| 1326 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the | |
| 1327 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if | |
| 1328 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. | |
| 1329 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace | |
| 1330 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances. | |
| 1331 @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 1332 | |
| 1333 @item : | |
| 1334 @kindex : | |
| 1335 @findex c-electric-colon | |
| 1336 @findex electric-colon (c-) | |
| 1337 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the | |
| 1338 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if | |
| 1339 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you | |
| 1340 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default | |
| 1341 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope | |
| 1342 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 1343 | |
| 1344 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation, | |
| 1345 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups. | |
| 1346 @xref{Other Commands}. | |
| 1347 | |
| 1348 @item ; | |
| 1349 @kindex ; | |
| 1350 @itemx , | |
| 1351 @kindex , | |
| 1352 @findex c-electric-semi&comma | |
| 1353 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-) | |
| 1354 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma}) | |
| 1355 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if | |
| 1356 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. | |
| 1357 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline | |
| 1358 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again | |
| 1359 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 1360 | |
| 1361 @end table | |
| 1362 | |
| 1363 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement | |
| 1364 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-) | |
| 1365 | |
| 1366 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are | |
| 1367 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that | |
| 1368 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one: | |
| 1369 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and | |
| 1370 @code{finally} (only in Java). | |
| 1371 | |
| 1372 An example: | |
| 1373 | |
| 1374 @example | |
| 1375 @group | |
| 1376 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) | |
| 1377 if (a[i]) | |
| 1378 res += a[i]->offset; | |
| 1379 else | |
| 1380 @end group | |
| 1381 @end example | |
| 1382 | |
| 1383 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if}, | |
| 1384 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically | |
| 1385 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only | |
| 1386 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a | |
| 1387 continuation of the preceding @code{if}. | |
| 1388 | |
| 1389 @vindex abbrev-mode | |
| 1390 @findex abbrev-mode | |
| 1391 @cindex Abbrev mode | |
| 1392 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,, @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}) | |
| 1393 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language | |
| 1394 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements. | |
| 1395 @end deffn | |
| 1396 | |
| 1397 | |
| 1398 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1399 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands | |
| 1400 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1401 @section Auto-newline Insertion | |
| 1402 @cindex auto-newline | |
| 1403 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1404 | |
| 1405 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor | |
| 1406 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain | |
| 1407 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a | |
| 1408 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the | |
| 1409 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both. | |
| 1410 | |
| 1411 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold: | |
| 1412 | |
| 1413 @itemize @bullet | |
| 1414 @item | |
| 1415 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator | |
| 1416 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g. @samp{C/a} or | |
| 1417 @samp{C/la}). | |
| 1418 | |
| 1419 @item | |
| 1420 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace | |
| 1421 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline. | |
| 1422 | |
| 1423 @item | |
| 1424 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to | |
| 1425 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.) | |
| 1426 | |
| 1427 @item | |
| 1428 @cindex literal | |
| 1429 @cindex syntactic whitespace | |
| 1430 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A | |
| 1431 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro | |
| 1432 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic | |
| 1433 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}. | |
| 1434 | |
| 1435 @item | |
| 1436 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e. it was typed as | |
| 1437 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix). | |
| 1438 @end itemize | |
| 1439 | |
| 1440 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get | |
| 1441 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style | |
| 1442 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably | |
| 1443 won't have to bother. | |
| 1444 | |
| 1445 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one, | |
| 1446 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}. | |
| 1447 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can | |
| 1448 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess | |
| 1449 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a | |
| 1450 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of | |
| 1451 clean-ups listed by key. | |
| 1452 | |
| 1453 | |
| 1454 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1455 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands | |
| 1456 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1457 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace | |
| 1458 @cindex hungry-deletion | |
| 1459 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1460 | |
| 1461 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can | |
| 1462 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace | |
| 1463 either before point or after point in a single operation. | |
| 1464 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or | |
| 1465 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the | |
| 1466 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example, | |
| 1467 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed | |
| 1468 @kbd{C-j}. | |
| 1469 | |
| 1470 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely | |
| 1471 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all} | |
| 1472 your editing modes! | |
| 1473 | |
| 1474 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the | |
| 1475 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete | |
| 1476 key''. This is discussed in more detail below. | |
| 1477 | |
| 1478 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion: | |
| 1479 | |
| 1480 @table @asis | |
| 1481 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} | |
| 1482 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x | |
| 1483 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command | |
| 1484 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding | |
| 1485 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This | |
| 1486 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry | |
| 1487 deletion. | |
| 1488 | |
| 1489 @table @asis | |
| 1490 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace}) | |
| 1491 @kindex DEL | |
| 1492 @findex c-electric-backspace | |
| 1493 @findex electric-backspace (c-) | |
| 1494 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When | |
| 1495 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in | |
| 1496 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix | |
| 1497 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just | |
| 1498 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the | |
| 1499 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function}, | |
| 1500 passing it the prefix argument, if any.) | |
| 1501 | |
| 1502 @item @code{c-backspace-function} | |
| 1503 @vindex c-backspace-function | |
| 1504 @vindex backspace-function (c-) | |
| 1505 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify | |
| 1506 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't | |
| 1507 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default | |
| 1508 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify} | |
| 1509 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which | |
| 1510 deletes a single character. | |
| 1511 | |
| 1512 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward}) | |
| 1513 @kindex C-d | |
| 1514 @findex c-electric-delete-forward | |
| 1515 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-) | |
| 1516 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like | |
| 1517 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it | |
| 1518 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it | |
| 1519 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it | |
| 1520 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix | |
| 1521 argument.) | |
| 1522 | |
| 1523 @item @code{c-delete-function} | |
| 1524 @vindex c-delete-function | |
| 1525 @vindex delete-function (c-) | |
| 1526 @findex delete-char | |
| 1527 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it | |
| 1528 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The | |
| 1529 default value is @code{delete-char}. | |
| 1530 @end table | |
| 1531 | |
| 1532 @item Using Distinct Bindings | |
| 1533 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to | |
| 1534 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and | |
| 1535 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences | |
| 1536 rather than using the minor mode toggling. | |
| 1537 | |
| 1538 @table @asis | |
| 1539 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.} | |
| 1540 @kindex C-c C-<backspace> | |
| 1541 @kindex C-c <backspace> | |
| 1542 @kindex C-c C-DEL | |
| 1543 @kindex C-c DEL | |
| 1544 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards | |
| 1545 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-) | |
| 1546 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless | |
| 1547 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound | |
| 1548 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more | |
| 1549 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at | |
| 1550 a character terminal. | |
| 1551 | |
| 1552 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward}) | |
| 1553 @kindex C-c C-d | |
| 1554 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE> | |
| 1555 @kindex C-c <DELETE> | |
| 1556 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward | |
| 1557 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-) | |
| 1558 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless | |
| 1559 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound | |
| 1560 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the | |
| 1561 same reason as for @key{DEL} above. | |
| 1562 @end table | |
| 1563 @end table | |
| 1564 | |
| 1565 @kindex <delete> | |
| 1566 @kindex <backspace> | |
| 1567 | |
| 1568 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we | |
| 1569 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly | |
| 1570 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to | |
| 1571 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using. | |
| 1572 | |
| 1573 @findex c-electric-delete | |
| 1574 @findex electric-delete (c-) | |
| 1575 @findex c-hungry-delete | |
| 1576 @findex hungry-delete (c-) | |
| 1577 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward | |
| 1578 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to | |
| 1579 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to | |
| 1580 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by | |
| 1581 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard | |
| 1582 XEmacs variable. | |
| 1583 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...). | |
| 1584 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do | |
| 1585 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it | |
| 1586 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly, | |
| 1587 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to | |
| 1588 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by | |
| 1589 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}. | |
| 1590 | |
| 1591 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode | |
| 1592 | |
| 1593 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and | |
| 1594 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment, | |
| 1595 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}} | |
| 1596 etc. If you need to change the bindings through | |
| 1597 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt | |
| 1598 its extended bindings accordingly. | |
| 1599 | |
| 1600 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either | |
| 1601 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes | |
| 1602 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings | |
| 1603 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this | |
| 1604 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable. | |
| 1605 | |
| 1606 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can | |
| 1607 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not | |
| 1608 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having | |
| 1609 trouble with this in GNU Emacs. | |
| 1610 | |
| 1611 | |
| 1612 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1613 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands | |
| 1614 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1615 @section Subword Movement and Editing | |
| 1616 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1617 | |
| 1618 @cindex nomenclature | |
| 1619 @cindex subword | |
| 1620 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol | |
| 1621 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g. @samp{GtkWidget}, | |
| 1622 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call | |
| 1623 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized | |
| 1624 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a | |
| 1625 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples: | |
| 1626 | |
| 1627 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}} | |
| 1628 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7 | |
| 1629 @iftex | |
| 1630 @item @b{Nomenclature} | |
| 1631 @tab @b{Subwords} | |
| 1632 @end iftex | |
| 1633 @ifnottex | |
| 1634 @item Nomenclature | |
| 1635 @tab Subwords | |
| 1636 @item --------------------------------------------------------- | |
| 1637 @end ifnottex | |
| 1638 @item @samp{GtkWindow} | |
| 1639 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window} | |
| 1640 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass} | |
| 1641 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class} | |
| 1642 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext} | |
| 1643 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context} | |
| 1644 @end multitable | |
| 1645 | |
| 1646 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and | |
| 1647 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a | |
| 1648 nomenclature and treat them as separate words: | |
| 1649 | |
| 1650 @findex c-forward-subword | |
| 1651 @findex forward-subword (c-) | |
| 1652 @findex c-backward-subword | |
| 1653 @findex backward-subword (c-) | |
| 1654 @findex c-mark-subword | |
| 1655 @findex mark-subword (c-) | |
| 1656 @findex c-kill-subword | |
| 1657 @findex kill-subword (c-) | |
| 1658 @findex c-backward-kill-subword | |
| 1659 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-) | |
| 1660 @findex c-transpose-subwords | |
| 1661 @findex transpose-subwords (c-) | |
| 1662 @findex c-capitalize-subword | |
| 1663 @findex capitalize-subword (c-) | |
| 1664 @findex c-upcase-subword | |
| 1665 @findex upcase-subword (c-) | |
| 1666 @findex c-downcase-subword | |
| 1667 @findex downcase-subword (c-) | |
| 1668 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40 | |
| 1669 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7 | |
| 1670 @iftex | |
| 1671 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command} | |
| 1672 @end iftex | |
| 1673 @ifnottex | |
| 1674 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command | |
| 1675 @item ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
| 1676 @end ifnottex | |
| 1677 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword} | |
| 1678 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword} | |
| 1679 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword} | |
| 1680 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword} | |
| 1681 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword} | |
| 1682 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords} | |
| 1683 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword} | |
| 1684 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword} | |
| 1685 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword} | |
| 1686 @end multitable | |
| 1687 | |
| 1688 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented | |
| 1689 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have | |
| 1690 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented | |
| 1691 commands. | |
| 1692 | |
| 1693 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the | |
| 1694 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your | |
| 1695 @file{.emacs}: | |
| 1696 | |
| 1697 @example | |
| 1698 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook | |
| 1699 (lambda () (c-subword-mode 1))) | |
| 1700 @end example | |
| 1701 | |
| 1702 As a bonus, you can also use @code{c-subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{} | |
| 1703 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x c-subword-mode}. | |
| 1704 | |
| 1705 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1706 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands | |
| 1707 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1708 @section Other Commands | |
| 1709 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1710 | |
| 1711 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else: | |
| 1712 | |
| 1713 @table @asis | |
| 1714 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style}) | |
| 1715 @kindex C-c . | |
| 1716 @findex c-set-style | |
| 1717 @findex set-style (c-) | |
| 1718 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this: | |
| 1719 | |
| 1720 @example | |
| 1721 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}} | |
| 1722 @end example | |
| 1723 | |
| 1724 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the | |
| 1725 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the | |
| 1726 ones you define yourself. | |
| 1727 | |
| 1728 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your | |
| 1729 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes, | |
| 1730 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}. | |
| 1731 | |
| 1732 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}. | |
| 1733 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator}) | |
| 1734 @kindex C-c : | |
| 1735 @findex c-scope-operator | |
| 1736 @findex scope-operator (c-) | |
| 1737 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope | |
| 1738 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion. | |
| 1739 @kbd{C-c :} does just this. | |
| 1740 | |
| 1741 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region}) | |
| 1742 @kindex C-c C-\ | |
| 1743 @findex c-backslash-region | |
| 1744 @findex backslash-region (c-) | |
| 1745 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in | |
| 1746 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros. | |
| 1747 | |
| 1748 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns | |
| 1749 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and | |
| 1750 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it | |
| 1751 deletes any backslashes. | |
| 1752 | |
| 1753 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If | |
| 1754 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash | |
| 1755 (if any) at the end of the previous line. | |
| 1756 | |
| 1757 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}. | |
| 1758 @end table | |
| 1759 | |
| 1760 @noindent | |
| 1761 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break} | |
| 1762 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit | |
| 1763 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it | |
| 1764 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end | |
| 1765 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the | |
| 1766 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside | |
| 1767 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother | |
| 1768 with the trailing backslashes. | |
| 1769 | |
| 1770 @table @asis | |
| 1771 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand}) | |
| 1772 @kindex C-c C-e | |
| 1773 @findex c-macro-expand | |
| 1774 @findex macro-expand (c-) | |
| 1775 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region, | |
| 1776 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it | |
| 1777 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix | |
| 1778 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region | |
| 1779 with the expansion. | |
| 1780 | |
| 1781 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key | |
| 1782 sequence is not bound in these other modes. | |
| 1783 | |
| 1784 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it | |
| 1785 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up | |
| 1786 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or | |
| 1787 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums. | |
| 1788 @end table | |
| 1789 | |
| 1790 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1791 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top | |
| 1792 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1793 @chapter Font Locking | |
| 1794 @cindex font locking | |
| 1795 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1796 | |
| 1797 @cindex Font Lock mode | |
| 1798 | |
| 1799 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by | |
| 1800 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you | |
| 1801 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments, | |
| 1802 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them | |
| 1803 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font | |
| 1804 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in | |
| 1805 @ccmode{} buffers. | |
| 1806 | |
| 1807 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not | |
| 1808 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this | |
| 1809 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK. The other | |
| 1810 sections apply to the other languages. | |
| 1811 | |
| 1812 @menu | |
| 1813 * Font Locking Preliminaries:: | |
| 1814 * Faces:: | |
| 1815 * Doc Comments:: | |
| 1816 * AWK Mode Font Locking:: | |
| 1817 @end menu | |
| 1818 | |
| 1819 | |
| 1820 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1821 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking | |
| 1822 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1823 @section Font Locking Preliminaries | |
| 1824 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1825 | |
| 1826 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided | |
| 1827 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}. | |
| 1828 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked | |
| 1829 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK | |
| 1830 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has | |
| 1831 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages | |
| 1832 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means | |
| 1833 that it's a bit different in most languages now. | |
| 1834 | |
| 1835 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide | |
| 1836 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like | |
| 1837 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like | |
| 1838 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great | |
| 1839 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when | |
| 1840 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly | |
| 1841 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can | |
| 1842 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the | |
| 1843 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,, | |
| 1844 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). | |
| 1845 | |
| 1846 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration | |
| 1847 | |
| 1848 The decoration levels are used as follows: | |
| 1849 | |
| 1850 @enumerate | |
| 1851 @comment 1 | |
| 1852 @item | |
| 1853 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor | |
| 1854 directives (in the languages that use cpp). | |
| 1855 | |
| 1856 @comment 2 | |
| 1857 @item | |
| 1858 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple | |
| 1859 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables | |
| 1860 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the | |
| 1861 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation | |
| 1862 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to | |
| 1863 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}). | |
| 1864 | |
| 1865 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest | |
| 1866 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns. | |
| 1867 | |
| 1868 @comment 3 | |
| 1869 @item | |
| 1870 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that | |
| 1871 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The | |
| 1872 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user | |
| 1873 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore | |
| 1874 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns | |
| 1875 that are uncertain. | |
| 1876 | |
| 1877 @cindex Lazy Lock mode | |
| 1878 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode | |
| 1879 | |
| 1880 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock | |
| 1881 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only | |
| 1882 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole | |
| 1883 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary | |
| 1884 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. | |
| 1885 @end enumerate | |
| 1886 | |
| 1887 @cindex user defined types | |
| 1888 @cindex types, user defined | |
| 1889 | |
| 1890 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide | |
| 1891 additional regexps to match those you use: | |
| 1892 | |
| 1893 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1894 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1895 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1896 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1897 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1898 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1899 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types}, | |
| 1900 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list | |
| 1901 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types, | |
| 1902 e.g. @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t} | |
| 1903 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a | |
| 1904 single identifier. | |
| 1905 | |
| 1906 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime | |
| 1907 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for | |
| 1908 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++. | |
| 1909 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names | |
| 1910 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages. | |
| 1911 | |
| 1912 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for | |
| 1913 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to | |
| 1914 recognize types. | |
| 1915 @end defopt | |
| 1916 | |
| 1917 | |
| 1918 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1919 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking | |
| 1920 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1921 @section Faces | |
| 1922 @cindex faces | |
| 1923 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1924 | |
| 1925 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages | |
| 1926 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra | |
| 1927 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face | |
| 1928 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide | |
| 1929 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. | |
| 1930 | |
| 1931 @itemize @bullet | |
| 1932 @item | |
| 1933 @vindex font-lock-comment-face | |
| 1934 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}. | |
| 1935 | |
| 1936 @item | |
| 1937 @vindex font-lock-doc-face | |
| 1938 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face | |
| 1939 @vindex font-lock-comment-face | |
| 1940 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments}) | |
| 1941 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or | |
| 1942 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If | |
| 1943 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used. | |
| 1944 | |
| 1945 @item | |
| 1946 @vindex font-lock-string-face | |
| 1947 String and character literals are fontified in | |
| 1948 @code{font-lock-string-face}. | |
| 1949 | |
| 1950 @item | |
| 1951 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face | |
| 1952 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}. | |
| 1953 | |
| 1954 @item | |
| 1955 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face | |
| 1956 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in | |
| 1957 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also | |
| 1958 used for preprocessor defines with arguments. | |
| 1959 | |
| 1960 @item | |
| 1961 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face | |
| 1962 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such | |
| 1963 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also | |
| 1964 used for preprocessor defines without arguments. | |
| 1965 | |
| 1966 @item | |
| 1967 @vindex font-lock-constant-face | |
| 1968 @vindex font-lock-reference-face | |
| 1969 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it | |
| 1970 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the | |
| 1971 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's | |
| 1972 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in | |
| 1973 them somewhere. | |
| 1974 | |
| 1975 @item | |
| 1976 @vindex font-lock-type-face | |
| 1977 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user | |
| 1978 defined) and classes in type contexts. | |
| 1979 | |
| 1980 @item | |
| 1981 @vindex font-lock-constant-face | |
| 1982 @vindex font-lock-reference-face | |
| 1983 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists, | |
| 1984 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. | |
| 1985 | |
| 1986 @item | |
| 1987 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like | |
| 1988 labels. | |
| 1989 | |
| 1990 @item | |
| 1991 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like | |
| 1992 labels. | |
| 1993 | |
| 1994 @item | |
| 1995 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face | |
| 1996 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face | |
| 1997 @vindex font-lock-reference-face | |
| 1998 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it | |
| 1999 exists (i.e. XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face} | |
| 2000 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent. | |
| 2001 | |
| 2002 @item | |
| 2003 @vindex font-lock-warning-face | |
| 2004 @vindex c-invalid-face | |
| 2005 @vindex invalid-face (c-) | |
| 2006 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with | |
| 2007 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions | |
| 2008 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special | |
| 2009 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by | |
| 2010 default. | |
| 2011 | |
| 2012 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives, | |
| 2013 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves. | |
| 2014 @end itemize | |
| 2015 | |
| 2016 | |
| 2017 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2018 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking | |
| 2019 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2020 @section Documentation Comments | |
| 2021 @cindex documentation comments | |
| 2022 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2023 | |
| 2024 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as | |
| 2025 specially structured comments, e.g. the standard Javadoc tool in Java. | |
| 2026 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and | |
| 2027 the special markup inside them. | |
| 2028 | |
| 2029 @defopt c-doc-comment-style | |
| 2030 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-) | |
| 2031 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment | |
| 2032 style to recognize, e.g. @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments. | |
| 2033 | |
| 2034 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are | |
| 2035 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't | |
| 2036 conflict). | |
| 2037 | |
| 2038 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment | |
| 2039 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then | |
| 2040 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as | |
| 2041 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol `other' is looked up | |
| 2042 and its value is used instead. | |
| 2043 | |
| 2044 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is | |
| 2045 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}. | |
| 2046 | |
| 2047 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that | |
| 2048 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when | |
| 2049 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it | |
| 2050 in some other way, e.g. interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need | |
| 2051 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to | |
| 2052 reinitialize. | |
| 2053 | |
| 2054 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style | |
| 2055 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-) | |
| 2056 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are | |
| 2057 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in | |
| 2058 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style} | |
| 2059 afterwards to redo that work. | |
| 2060 @end defopt | |
| 2061 | |
| 2062 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment | |
| 2063 styles: | |
| 2064 | |
| 2065 @table @code | |
| 2066 @item javadoc | |
| 2067 @cindex Javadoc markup | |
| 2068 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java. | |
| 2069 | |
| 2070 @item autodoc | |
| 2071 @cindex Pike autodoc markup | |
| 2072 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike. | |
| 2073 | |
| 2074 @item gtkdoc | |
| 2075 @cindex GtkDoc markup | |
| 2076 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community. | |
| 2077 @end table | |
| 2078 | |
| 2079 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for | |
| 2080 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and | |
| 2081 Bug Reports}). | |
| 2082 | |
| 2083 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use | |
| 2084 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function | |
| 2085 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use | |
| 2086 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to | |
| 2087 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode | |
| 2088 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see | |
| 2089 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}. | |
| 2090 | |
| 2091 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider | |
| 2092 contributing it - send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. | |
| 2093 | |
| 2094 | |
| 2095 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2096 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking | |
| 2097 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2098 @section AWK Mode Font Locking | |
| 2099 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2100 | |
| 2101 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any | |
| 2102 other programming mode. @xref{Faces For Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs | |
| 2103 Lisp Reference Manual}. | |
| 2104 | |
| 2105 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in | |
| 2106 AWK mode: | |
| 2107 | |
| 2108 @table @asis | |
| 2109 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face} | |
| 2110 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are | |
| 2111 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system | |
| 2112 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as | |
| 2113 @code{"/dev/stderr"}). | |
| 2114 | |
| 2115 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs) | |
| 2116 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}. | |
| 2117 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for | |
| 2118 standard functions (such as @code{match}). | |
| 2119 | |
| 2120 @item @code{font-lock-string-face} | |
| 2121 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings, | |
| 2122 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK | |
| 2123 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}). | |
| 2124 | |
| 2125 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs) | |
| 2126 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK | |
| 2127 constructs: | |
| 2128 | |
| 2129 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2130 @item | |
| 2131 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening | |
| 2132 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in | |
| 2133 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a | |
| 2134 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face | |
| 2135 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct. | |
| 2136 | |
| 2137 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions | |
| 2138 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line | |
| 2139 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly), | |
| 2140 rather than the text up to the next string quote. | |
| 2141 | |
| 2142 @item | |
| 2143 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling | |
| 2144 a user function. The last character of the function name and the | |
| 2145 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will | |
| 2146 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an | |
| 2147 identifier precedes a parenthesised expression. Unfortunately. | |
| 2148 | |
| 2149 @item | |
| 2150 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an | |
| 2151 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted. | |
| 2152 @end itemize | |
| 2153 @end table | |
| 2154 | |
| 2155 | |
| 2156 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2157 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top | |
| 2158 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2159 @chapter Configuration Basics | |
| 2160 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2161 | |
| 2162 @cindex Emacs Initialization File | |
| 2163 @cindex Configuration | |
| 2164 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and | |
| 2165 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't | |
| 2166 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs | |
| 2167 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or | |
| 2168 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some | |
| 2169 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For | |
| 2170 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}'' | |
| 2171 throughout the rest of the manual. | |
| 2172 | |
| 2173 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as | |
| 2174 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known | |
| 2175 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group, | |
| 2176 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style | |
| 2177 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and | |
| 2178 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}. | |
| 2179 | |
| 2180 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the | |
| 2181 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page. | |
| 2182 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest | |
| 2183 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''. | |
| 2184 | |
| 2185 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way | |
| 2186 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list: | |
| 2187 @itemize @asis | |
| 2188 @item | |
| 2189 @table @asis | |
| 2190 @item Style | |
| 2191 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface'' | |
| 2192 @itemx Hook | |
| 2193 @itemx File Style | |
| 2194 @end table | |
| 2195 @end itemize | |
| 2196 | |
| 2197 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration | |
| 2198 settings: | |
| 2199 | |
| 2200 @table @asis | |
| 2201 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface'' | |
| 2202 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top | |
| 2203 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer, | |
| 2204 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least, | |
| 2205 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to | |
| 2206 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first | |
| 2207 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read} | |
| 2208 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For | |
| 2209 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus: | |
| 2210 | |
| 2211 @example | |
| 2212 (setq c-basic-offset 4) | |
| 2213 @end example | |
| 2214 | |
| 2215 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead, | |
| 2216 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this, | |
| 2217 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}. | |
| 2218 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. | |
| 2219 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual. | |
| 2220 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your | |
| 2221 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit | |
| 2222 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after} | |
| 2223 the customizations. | |
| 2224 | |
| 2225 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the | |
| 2226 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}. | |
| 2227 @xref{Built-in Styles}. | |
| 2228 | |
| 2229 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is | |
| 2230 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{} | |
| 2231 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers. | |
| 2232 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s | |
| 2233 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles. | |
| 2234 | |
| 2235 @item Hooks | |
| 2236 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want | |
| 2237 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances. | |
| 2238 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main | |
| 2239 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports - any | |
| 2240 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a | |
| 2241 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization | |
| 2242 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the | |
| 2243 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you | |
| 2244 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C | |
| 2245 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this: | |
| 2246 | |
| 2247 @example | |
| 2248 @group | |
| 2249 (defun my-c-mode-hook () | |
| 2250 (setq c-basic-offset 3)) | |
| 2251 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook) | |
| 2252 | |
| 2253 (defun my-java-mode-hook () | |
| 2254 (setq c-basic-offset 6)) | |
| 2255 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook) | |
| 2256 @end group | |
| 2257 @end example | |
| 2258 | |
| 2259 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks. | |
| 2260 | |
| 2261 @item Styles | |
| 2262 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations | |
| 2263 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each | |
| 2264 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default. | |
| 2265 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally, | |
| 2266 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing | |
| 2267 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free | |
| 2268 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this | |
| 2269 in your @file{.emacs} file: | |
| 2270 | |
| 2271 @example | |
| 2272 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java") | |
| 2273 (awk-mode . "awk") | |
| 2274 (other . "free-group-style"))) | |
| 2275 @end example | |
| 2276 | |
| 2277 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how | |
| 2278 to create them. | |
| 2279 | |
| 2280 @item File Styles | |
| 2281 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism | |
| 2282 described above, which applies to an individual source file. To use | |
| 2283 it, you set certain Emacs local variables in a special block at the | |
| 2284 end of the source file. @xref{File Styles}. | |
| 2285 | |
| 2286 @item Hooks with Styles | |
| 2287 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For | |
| 2288 example, if your team were developing a product which required a | |
| 2289 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the | |
| 2290 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You | |
| 2291 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 2292 | |
| 2293 @example | |
| 2294 @group | |
| 2295 (defun my-c-mode-hook () | |
| 2296 (c-set-style | |
| 2297 (if (and (buffer-file-name) | |
| 2298 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name))) | |
| 2299 "linux" | |
| 2300 "free-group-style"))) | |
| 2301 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook) | |
| 2302 @end group | |
| 2303 @end example | |
| 2304 | |
| 2305 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member | |
| 2306 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the | |
| 2307 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could | |
| 2308 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your | |
| 2309 @file{.emacs}: | |
| 2310 | |
| 2311 @example | |
| 2312 @group | |
| 2313 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline () | |
| 2314 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1)) | |
| 2315 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline) | |
| 2316 @end group | |
| 2317 @end example | |
| 2318 @end table | |
| 2319 | |
| 2320 @menu | |
| 2321 * CC Hooks:: | |
| 2322 * Style Variables:: | |
| 2323 * Styles:: | |
| 2324 @end menu | |
| 2325 | |
| 2326 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2327 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics | |
| 2328 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2329 @section Hooks | |
| 2330 @cindex mode hooks | |
| 2331 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2332 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in | |
| 2333 @c some older versions of Info, e.g. the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3. | |
| 2334 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC | |
| 2335 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC | |
| 2336 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead | |
| 2337 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note: | |
| 2338 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node. | |
| 2339 | |
| 2340 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the | |
| 2341 mode for your coding style. The main hook is | |
| 2342 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your | |
| 2343 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own | |
| 2344 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the | |
| 2345 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization | |
| 2346 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables | |
| 2347 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in | |
| 2348 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the | |
| 2349 standard Emacs conventions. | |
| 2350 | |
| 2351 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the | |
| 2352 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls | |
| 2353 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific | |
| 2354 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override | |
| 2355 those set by @code{c-default-style}. | |
| 2356 | |
| 2357 @defvar c-initialization-hook | |
| 2358 @vindex initialization-hook (c-) | |
| 2359 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized. | |
| 2360 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any | |
| 2361 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample .emacs File}. | |
| 2362 @end defvar | |
| 2363 | |
| 2364 @defvar c-mode-common-hook | |
| 2365 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-) | |
| 2366 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the | |
| 2367 language specific hook. | |
| 2368 @end defvar | |
| 2369 | |
| 2370 @defvar c-mode-hook | |
| 2371 @defvarx c++-mode-hook | |
| 2372 @defvarx objc-mode-hook | |
| 2373 @defvarx java-mode-hook | |
| 2374 @defvarx idl-mode-hook | |
| 2375 @defvarx pike-mode-hook | |
| 2376 @defvarx awk-mode-hook | |
| 2377 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the | |
| 2378 last thing when you enter that language mode. | |
| 2379 @end defvar | |
| 2380 | |
| 2381 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give | |
| 2382 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the | |
| 2383 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't | |
| 2384 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded. | |
| 2385 | |
| 2386 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs} | |
| 2387 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the | |
| 2388 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks. | |
| 2389 @xref{Sample .emacs File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs} | |
| 2390 file. | |
| 2391 | |
| 2392 @example | |
| 2393 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook () | |
| 2394 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes | |
| 2395 (no-case-fold-search) | |
| 2396 ) | |
| 2397 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook) | |
| 2398 @end example | |
| 2399 | |
| 2400 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2401 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics | |
| 2402 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2403 @section Style Variables | |
| 2404 @cindex styles | |
| 2405 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2406 | |
| 2407 @cindex style variables | |
| 2408 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called | |
| 2409 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp | |
| 2410 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their | |
| 2411 values at any time (e.g. in a hook function). The style system can | |
| 2412 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}. | |
| 2413 | |
| 2414 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways: | |
| 2415 | |
| 2416 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2417 @item | |
| 2418 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they | |
| 2419 can instead be made global by setting | |
| 2420 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is | |
| 2421 initialized. | |
| 2422 | |
| 2423 @item | |
| 2424 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior | |
| 2425 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-) | |
| 2426 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions | |
| 2427 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the | |
| 2428 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a | |
| 2429 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it | |
| 2430 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its | |
| 2431 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of | |
| 2432 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden | |
| 2433 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was | |
| 2434 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to | |
| 2435 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding | |
| 2436 behavior, you can set the variable | |
| 2437 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This | |
| 2438 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with | |
| 2439 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config | |
| 2440 Basics}). | |
| 2441 | |
| 2442 @item | |
| 2443 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is | |
| 2444 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's | |
| 2445 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's | |
| 2446 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than | |
| 2447 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you | |
| 2448 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling | |
| 2449 @code{c-set-offset}(@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set | |
| 2450 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then | |
| 2451 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of | |
| 2452 @code{c-offsets-alist}. | |
| 2453 | |
| 2454 @item | |
| 2455 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a | |
| 2456 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove | |
| 2457 them, so any global settings you put on it are always | |
| 2458 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value | |
| 2459 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function | |
| 2460 or a list of functions. | |
| 2461 | |
| 2462 @item | |
| 2463 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special | |
| 2464 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized. | |
| 2465 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details. | |
| 2466 @end itemize | |
| 2467 | |
| 2468 The style variables are:@* | |
| 2469 @code{c-indent-comment-alist}, | |
| 2470 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation | |
| 2471 Commands});@* | |
| 2472 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@* | |
| 2473 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} | |
| 2474 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@* | |
| 2475 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@* | |
| 2476 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@* | |
| 2477 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and | |
| 2478 Commas});@* | |
| 2479 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@* | |
| 2480 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@* | |
| 2481 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@* | |
| 2482 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@* | |
| 2483 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation} | |
| 2484 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@* | |
| 2485 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column} | |
| 2486 (@pxref{Custom Macros}). | |
| 2487 | |
| 2488 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2489 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics | |
| 2490 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2491 @section Styles | |
| 2492 @cindex styles | |
| 2493 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2494 | |
| 2495 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many | |
| 2496 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets | |
| 2497 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct | |
| 2498 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line. | |
| 2499 | |
| 2500 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined | |
| 2501 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a | |
| 2502 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly, | |
| 2503 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style. | |
| 2504 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as | |
| 2505 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For | |
| 2506 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical | |
| 2507 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name | |
| 2508 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or | |
| 2509 existing code using these styles. | |
| 2510 | |
| 2511 @menu | |
| 2512 * Built-in Styles:: | |
| 2513 * Choosing a Style:: | |
| 2514 * Adding Styles:: | |
| 2515 * File Styles:: | |
| 2516 @end menu | |
| 2517 | |
| 2518 | |
| 2519 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2520 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles | |
| 2521 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2522 @subsection Built-in Styles | |
| 2523 @cindex styles, built-in | |
| 2524 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2525 | |
| 2526 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just | |
| 2527 what you're looking for. These are: | |
| 2528 | |
| 2529 @table @code | |
| 2530 @item gnu | |
| 2531 @cindex GNU style | |
| 2532 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation | |
| 2533 for C code in GNU programs. | |
| 2534 | |
| 2535 @item k&r | |
| 2536 @cindex K&R style | |
| 2537 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code. | |
| 2538 | |
| 2539 @item bsd | |
| 2540 @cindex BSD style | |
| 2541 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman. | |
| 2542 | |
| 2543 @item whitesmith | |
| 2544 @cindex Whitesmith style | |
| 2545 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early | |
| 2546 commercial C compiler. | |
| 2547 | |
| 2548 @item stroustrup | |
| 2549 @cindex Stroustrup style | |
| 2550 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code. | |
| 2551 | |
| 2552 @item ellemtel | |
| 2553 @cindex Ellemtel style | |
| 2554 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules | |
| 2555 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson, | |
| 2556 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at | |
| 2557 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other | |
| 2558 places.}. | |
| 2559 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM). | |
| 2560 | |
| 2561 @item linux | |
| 2562 @cindex Linux style | |
| 2563 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel). | |
| 2564 | |
| 2565 @item python | |
| 2566 @cindex Python style | |
| 2567 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a | |
| 2568 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface. | |
| 2569 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}. | |
| 2570 | |
| 2571 @item java | |
| 2572 @cindex Java style | |
| 2573 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default | |
| 2574 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter | |
| 2575 @code{java-mode}. | |
| 2576 | |
| 2577 @item awk | |
| 2578 @cindex AWK style | |
| 2579 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for | |
| 2580 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter | |
| 2581 @code{awk-mode}. | |
| 2582 | |
| 2583 @item user | |
| 2584 @cindex User style | |
| 2585 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory | |
| 2586 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations | |
| 2587 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing | |
| 2588 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your | |
| 2589 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates | |
| 2590 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it | |
| 2591 afterwards. | |
| 2592 @end table | |
| 2593 | |
| 2594 | |
| 2595 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2596 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles | |
| 2597 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2598 @subsection Choosing a Style | |
| 2599 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2600 | |
| 2601 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from | |
| 2602 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu}, | |
| 2603 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}. | |
| 2604 | |
| 2605 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization | |
| 2606 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the | |
| 2607 style system is initialised (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will | |
| 2608 override the one that the style system would have given the variable. | |
| 2609 | |
| 2610 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .} | |
| 2611 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable | |
| 2612 list, @ref{File Styles}. | |
| 2613 | |
| 2614 @defopt c-default-style | |
| 2615 @vindex default-style (c-) | |
| 2616 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new | |
| 2617 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list | |
| 2618 of major mode symbols to style names: | |
| 2619 | |
| 2620 @enumerate | |
| 2621 @item | |
| 2622 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style | |
| 2623 name. This style is then used for all modes. | |
| 2624 | |
| 2625 @item | |
| 2626 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language | |
| 2627 is looked up to find a style name string. | |
| 2628 | |
| 2629 @item | |
| 2630 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode | |
| 2631 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is | |
| 2632 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used. | |
| 2633 | |
| 2634 @item | |
| 2635 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used. | |
| 2636 @end enumerate | |
| 2637 | |
| 2638 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed | |
| 2639 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override | |
| 2640 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your | |
| 2641 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}. | |
| 2642 | |
| 2643 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode | |
| 2644 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}. | |
| 2645 @end defopt | |
| 2646 | |
| 2647 @defvar c-indentation-style | |
| 2648 @vindex indentation-style (c-) | |
| 2649 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a | |
| 2650 string. | |
| 2651 @end defvar | |
| 2652 | |
| 2653 | |
| 2654 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2655 @node Adding Styles, File Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles | |
| 2656 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2657 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles | |
| 2658 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2659 | |
| 2660 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to | |
| 2661 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing | |
| 2662 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the | |
| 2663 following format - the list can then be passed as an argument to the | |
| 2664 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style | |
| 2665 definition in @ref{Sample .emacs File}. | |
| 2666 | |
| 2667 @cindex style definition | |
| 2668 @c @defvr {List} style definition | |
| 2669 @table @asis | |
| 2670 @item Structure of a Style Definition List | |
| 2671 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}]) | |
| 2672 | |
| 2673 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the | |
| 2674 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most | |
| 2675 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If | |
| 2676 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table | |
| 2677 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in | |
| 2678 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually | |
| 2679 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The | |
| 2680 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}. | |
| 2681 | |
| 2682 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a | |
| 2683 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later | |
| 2684 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value | |
| 2685 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of | |
| 2686 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system | |
| 2687 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a | |
| 2688 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the | |
| 2689 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style | |
| 2690 system. | |
| 2691 @c @end defvr | |
| 2692 | |
| 2693 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list: | |
| 2694 | |
| 2695 @table @code | |
| 2696 @item c-offsets-alist | |
| 2697 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form | |
| 2698 | |
| 2699 @example | |
| 2700 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}}) | |
| 2701 @end example | |
| 2702 | |
| 2703 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to | |
| 2704 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol | |
| 2705 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style. | |
| 2706 | |
| 2707 @item c-special-indent-hook | |
| 2708 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using | |
| 2709 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value | |
| 2710 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}. | |
| 2711 @end table | |
| 2712 @end table | |
| 2713 | |
| 2714 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you | |
| 2715 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{} | |
| 2716 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose. | |
| 2717 | |
| 2718 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p | |
| 2719 @findex add-style (c-) | |
| 2720 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string. | |
| 2721 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described | |
| 2722 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then | |
| 2723 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is | |
| 2724 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.) | |
| 2725 Otherwise, a new style is added. | |
| 2726 | |
| 2727 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is | |
| 2728 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is | |
| 2729 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release. | |
| 2730 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead. | |
| 2731 | |
| 2732 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new | |
| 2733 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample .emacs File}. | |
| 2734 @end defun | |
| 2735 | |
| 2736 @defvar c-style-alist | |
| 2737 @vindex style-alist (c-) | |
| 2738 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It | |
| 2739 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead. | |
| 2740 @end defvar | |
| 2741 | |
| 2742 | |
| 2743 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2744 @node File Styles, , Adding Styles, Styles | |
| 2745 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2746 @subsection File Styles | |
| 2747 @cindex styles, file local | |
| 2748 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2749 | |
| 2750 @cindex file local variables | |
| 2751 | |
| 2752 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a | |
| 2753 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end | |
| 2754 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files, @emacsman{}, | |
| 2755 @emacsmantitle{}}). | |
| 2756 | |
| 2757 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in | |
| 2758 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by | |
| 2759 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list. | |
| 2760 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style | |
| 2761 on a per-file basis: | |
| 2762 | |
| 2763 @defvar c-file-style | |
| 2764 @vindex file-style (c-) | |
| 2765 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list. | |
| 2766 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set | |
| 2767 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}. | |
| 2768 @end defvar | |
| 2769 | |
| 2770 @defvar c-file-offsets | |
| 2771 @vindex file-offsets (c-) | |
| 2772 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list | |
| 2773 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you | |
| 2774 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets | |
| 2775 using @code{c-set-offset}. | |
| 2776 @end defvar | |
| 2777 | |
| 2778 Note that file style settings (i.e. @code{c-file-style}) are applied | |
| 2779 before file offset settings | |
| 2780 (i.e. @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set | |
| 2781 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are | |
| 2782 made local to that buffer, even if | |
| 2783 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this | |
| 2784 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to | |
| 2785 notice this effect.}. | |
| 2786 | |
| 2787 If you set any variables, including style variables, by the file local | |
| 2788 variables mechanism, these settings take priority over all other | |
| 2789 settings, even those in your mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). If you | |
| 2790 use @code{c-file-style} or @code{c-file-offsets} and also explicitly | |
| 2791 set a style variable in a local variable block, the explicit setting | |
| 2792 will take priority. | |
| 2793 | |
| 2794 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2795 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top | |
| 2796 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2797 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking | |
| 2798 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2799 | |
| 2800 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals, | |
| 2801 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does | |
| 2802 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning | |
| 2803 relevant variables as necessary. | |
| 2804 | |
| 2805 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp | |
| 2806 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-) | |
| 2807 @cindex comment line prefix | |
| 2808 @vindex comment-start | |
| 2809 @vindex comment-end | |
| 2810 @vindex comment-start-skip | |
| 2811 @vindex paragraph-start | |
| 2812 @vindex paragraph-separate | |
| 2813 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix | |
| 2814 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode | |
| 2815 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp | |
| 2816 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp | |
| 2817 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal | |
| 2818 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard | |
| 2819 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end}, | |
| 2820 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start}, | |
| 2821 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix}, | |
| 2822 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and | |
| 2823 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them | |
| 2824 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix. | |
| 2825 | |
| 2826 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp | |
| 2827 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-) | |
| 2828 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the | |
| 2829 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts | |
| 2830 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line | |
| 2831 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different | |
| 2832 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is | |
| 2833 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it | |
| 2834 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead. | |
| 2835 | |
| 2836 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{} | |
| 2837 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighbouring line at the start | |
| 2838 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is | |
| 2839 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like | |
| 2840 | |
| 2841 @example | |
| 2842 // blah blah | |
| 2843 @end example | |
| 2844 | |
| 2845 @noindent | |
| 2846 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and | |
| 2847 subsequent lines of C style block comments like | |
| 2848 | |
| 2849 @example | |
| 2850 @group | |
| 2851 /* | |
| 2852 * blah blah | |
| 2853 */ | |
| 2854 @end group | |
| 2855 @end example | |
| 2856 | |
| 2857 @noindent | |
| 2858 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change | |
| 2859 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter | |
| 2860 (i.e. @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside | |
| 2861 block comments. | |
| 2862 | |
| 2863 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables | |
| 2864 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-) | |
| 2865 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of | |
| 2866 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at | |
| 2867 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it | |
| 2868 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command | |
| 2869 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other | |
| 2870 variables. That's also the case if you modify | |
| 2871 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will | |
| 2872 already have set up these variables before calling the hook. | |
| 2873 @end defopt | |
| 2874 | |
| 2875 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt | |
| 2876 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment. | |
| 2877 | |
| 2878 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode | |
| 2879 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode | |
| 2880 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU | |
| 2881 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when | |
| 2882 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text | |
| 2883 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g. in the | |
| 2884 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left | |
| 2885 margins of the texts kept intact: | |
| 2886 | |
| 2887 @example | |
| 2888 @group | |
| 2889 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming | |
| 2890 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E. | |
| 2891 * Knuth, | |
| 2892 * | |
| 2893 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only | |
| 2894 * proved it correct, not tried it. | |
| 2895 */ | |
| 2896 @end group | |
| 2897 @end example | |
| 2898 | |
| 2899 @findex c-setup-filladapt | |
| 2900 @findex setup-filladapt (c-) | |
| 2901 @findex filladapt-mode | |
| 2902 @vindex filladapt-mode | |
| 2903 @cindex Filladapt mode | |
| 2904 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle | |
| 2905 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from | |
| 2906 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however | |
| 2907 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when | |
| 2908 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does | |
| 2909 by default). A patch for that is available from | |
| 2910 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.}, | |
| 2911 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case. | |
| 2912 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience | |
| 2913 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in | |
| 2914 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g. with | |
| 2915 something like this in your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 2916 | |
| 2917 @example | |
| 2918 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook () | |
| 2919 (c-setup-filladapt) | |
| 2920 (filladapt-mode 1)) | |
| 2921 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook) | |
| 2922 @end example | |
| 2923 | |
| 2924 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix | |
| 2925 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-) | |
| 2926 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars | |
| 2927 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-) | |
| 2928 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a | |
| 2929 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one | |
| 2930 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like, | |
| 2931 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style | |
| 2932 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called | |
| 2933 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure, | |
| 2934 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used | |
| 2935 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{* | |
| 2936 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of | |
| 2937 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default | |
| 2938 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line | |
| 2939 splitting effect described here by setting a different style, | |
| 2940 e.g. @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment | |
| 2941 | |
| 2942 @example | |
| 2943 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */ | |
| 2944 @end example | |
| 2945 | |
| 2946 @noindent | |
| 2947 break into | |
| 2948 | |
| 2949 @example | |
| 2950 @group | |
| 2951 /* Got O(n^2) here, which | |
| 2952 * is a Bad Thing. */ | |
| 2953 @end group | |
| 2954 @end example | |
| 2955 | |
| 2956 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading | |
| 2957 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the | |
| 2958 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to | |
| 2959 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It | |
| 2960 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of | |
| 2961 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}. | |
| 2962 @end defopt | |
| 2963 | |
| 2964 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill | |
| 2965 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-) | |
| 2966 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it | |
| 2967 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g. to never | |
| 2968 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable | |
| 2969 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling | |
| 2970 never should occur: | |
| 2971 | |
| 2972 @table @code | |
| 2973 @item string | |
| 2974 Inside a string or character literal. | |
| 2975 @item c | |
| 2976 Inside a C style block comment. | |
| 2977 @item c++ | |
| 2978 Inside a C++ style line comment. | |
| 2979 @item cpp | |
| 2980 Inside a preprocessor directive. | |
| 2981 @item code | |
| 2982 Anywhere else, i.e. in normal code. | |
| 2983 @end table | |
| 2984 | |
| 2985 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp | |
| 2986 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated, | |
| 2987 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often | |
| 2988 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor | |
| 2989 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline | |
| 2990 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would | |
| 2991 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally | |
| 2992 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last | |
| 2993 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor | |
| 2994 results in the current implementation. | |
| 2995 @end defopt | |
| 2996 | |
| 2997 @vindex comment-multi-line | |
| 2998 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto Fill,,, | |
| 2999 @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the indentation and | |
| 3000 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and | |
| 3001 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same | |
| 3002 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for | |
| 3003 comments. | |
| 3004 | |
| 3005 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at | |
| 3006 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences | |
| 3007 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated | |
| 3008 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code | |
| 3009 (e.g. @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to | |
| 3010 inconsistent behavior. | |
| 3011 | |
| 3012 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3013 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top | |
| 3014 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3015 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines | |
| 3016 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3017 | |
| 3018 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically | |
| 3019 different ways, depending on the character just typed: | |
| 3020 | |
| 3021 @table @asis | |
| 3022 @item Braces and Colons | |
| 3023 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon | |
| 3024 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in | |
| 3025 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines - this is any | |
| 3026 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist | |
| 3027 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace, | |
| 3028 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and | |
| 3029 @ref{Hanging Colons}. | |
| 3030 | |
| 3031 @item Semicolons and Commas | |
| 3032 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of | |
| 3033 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly | |
| 3034 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}. | |
| 3035 @end table | |
| 3036 | |
| 3037 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging} | |
| 3038 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character | |
| 3039 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when | |
| 3040 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a | |
| 3041 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in: | |
| 3042 | |
| 3043 @example | |
| 3044 @group | |
| 3045 while (i < MAX) @{ | |
| 3046 total += entry[i]; | |
| 3047 entry [i++] = 0; | |
| 3048 @} | |
| 3049 @end group | |
| 3050 @end example | |
| 3051 | |
| 3052 @noindent | |
| 3053 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of | |
| 3054 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing | |
| 3055 brace. | |
| 3056 | |
| 3057 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{} | |
| 3058 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific | |
| 3059 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 3060 | |
| 3061 @menu | |
| 3062 * Hanging Braces:: | |
| 3063 * Hanging Colons:: | |
| 3064 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas:: | |
| 3065 @end menu | |
| 3066 | |
| 3067 | |
| 3068 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3069 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines | |
| 3070 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3071 @section Hanging Braces | |
| 3072 @cindex hanging braces | |
| 3073 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3074 | |
| 3075 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around, | |
| 3076 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its | |
| 3077 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how | |
| 3078 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given | |
| 3079 in @ref{Style Variables}. | |
| 3080 | |
| 3081 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following | |
| 3082 @samp{@{}: | |
| 3083 | |
| 3084 @example | |
| 3085 if (foo < 17) @{ | |
| 3086 @end example | |
| 3087 | |
| 3088 @noindent | |
| 3089 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type | |
| 3090 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its | |
| 3091 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if | |
| 3092 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you | |
| 3093 something like: | |
| 3094 | |
| 3095 @example | |
| 3096 ((substatement-open 1061)) | |
| 3097 @end example | |
| 3098 | |
| 3099 @noindent | |
| 3100 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))} | |
| 3101 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. | |
| 3102 | |
| 3103 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol, | |
| 3104 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}: | |
| 3105 | |
| 3106 @example | |
| 3107 (brace-entry-open) | |
| 3108 @end example | |
| 3109 | |
| 3110 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist}, | |
| 3111 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a | |
| 3112 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a | |
| 3113 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this | |
| 3114 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace. | |
| 3115 | |
| 3116 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist | |
| 3117 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-) | |
| 3118 | |
| 3119 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to | |
| 3120 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association | |
| 3121 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the | |
| 3122 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list, | |
| 3123 or a function. | |
| 3124 | |
| 3125 @table @asis | |
| 3126 @item The Key - the syntactic symbol | |
| 3127 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are | |
| 3128 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 3129 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the | |
| 3130 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols}, | |
| 3131 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for | |
| 3132 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't | |
| 3133 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get | |
| 3134 ignored. | |
| 3135 | |
| 3136 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special | |
| 3137 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that | |
| 3138 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The | |
| 3139 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of | |
| 3140 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in | |
| 3141 normal indentation analysis.}. | |
| 3142 | |
| 3143 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})}, | |
| 3144 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace | |
| 3145 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation | |
| 3146 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on | |
| 3147 these constructs. | |
| 3148 | |
| 3149 @item The associated value - the ``ACTION'' list or function | |
| 3150 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association | |
| 3151 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a | |
| 3152 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use | |
| 3153 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}. | |
| 3154 | |
| 3155 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's | |
| 3156 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and | |
| 3157 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in | |
| 3158 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains | |
| 3159 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side | |
| 3160 of the line, as in: | |
| 3161 | |
| 3162 @example | |
| 3163 // here, open braces always `hang' | |
| 3164 void spam( int i ) @{ | |
| 3165 if( i == 7 ) @{ | |
| 3166 dosomething(i); | |
| 3167 @} | |
| 3168 @} | |
| 3169 @end example | |
| 3170 | |
| 3171 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces | |
| 3172 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in | |
| 3173 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines | |
| 3174 are added neither before nor after the brace. | |
| 3175 @end table | |
| 3176 | |
| 3177 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from | |
| 3178 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an | |
| 3179 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so | |
| 3180 that braces by default end up on their own line. | |
| 3181 | |
| 3182 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is: | |
| 3183 | |
| 3184 @example | |
| 3185 ((brace-list-open) | |
| 3186 (brace-entry-open) | |
| 3187 (statement-cont) | |
| 3188 (substatement-open after) | |
| 3189 (block-close . c-snug-do-while) | |
| 3190 (extern-lang-open after) | |
| 3191 (namespace-open after) | |
| 3192 (module-open after) | |
| 3193 (composition-open after) | |
| 3194 (inexpr-class-open after) | |
| 3195 (inexpr-class-close before)) | |
| 3196 @end example | |
| 3197 | |
| 3198 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open}, | |
| 3199 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists | |
| 3200 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables | |
| 3201 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All | |
| 3202 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces | |
| 3203 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow | |
| 3204 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open}, | |
| 3205 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang | |
| 3206 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line. | |
| 3207 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't | |
| 3208 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the | |
| 3209 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as | |
| 3210 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by | |
| 3211 themselves. | |
| 3212 @end defopt | |
| 3213 | |
| 3214 @menu | |
| 3215 * Custom Braces:: | |
| 3216 @end menu | |
| 3217 | |
| 3218 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3219 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces | |
| 3220 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3221 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging | |
| 3222 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3223 | |
| 3224 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist | |
| 3225 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-) | |
| 3226 @cindex action functions | |
| 3227 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize | |
| 3228 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember | |
| 3229 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of | |
| 3230 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}). | |
| 3231 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by | |
| 3232 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in | |
| 3233 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the | |
| 3234 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it. | |
| 3235 | |
| 3236 @cindex customization, brace hanging | |
| 3237 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol | |
| 3238 for the brace (e.g. @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position | |
| 3239 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an | |
| 3240 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g. by using | |
| 3241 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing | |
| 3242 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither | |
| 3243 of them (i.e. @code{nil}). | |
| 3244 | |
| 3245 @defvar c-syntactic-context | |
| 3246 @vindex syntactic-context (c-) | |
| 3247 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action} | |
| 3248 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list. | |
| 3249 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever | |
| 3250 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt | |
| 3251 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}. | |
| 3252 | |
| 3253 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances: | |
| 3254 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function | |
| 3255 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a | |
| 3256 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a | |
| 3257 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}). | |
| 3258 @end defvar | |
| 3259 | |
| 3260 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically | |
| 3261 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while'' | |
| 3262 constructs: | |
| 3263 | |
| 3264 @example | |
| 3265 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string ) | |
| 3266 @{ | |
| 3267 int i=0; | |
| 3268 do @{ | |
| 3269 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] ); | |
| 3270 i++; | |
| 3271 @} while( i < count ); | |
| 3272 @} | |
| 3273 @end example | |
| 3274 | |
| 3275 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the | |
| 3276 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the | |
| 3277 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate | |
| 3278 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the | |
| 3279 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we | |
| 3280 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function | |
| 3281 @code{c-snug-do-while}: | |
| 3282 | |
| 3283 @example | |
| 3284 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos) | |
| 3285 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements." | |
| 3286 (save-excursion | |
| 3287 (let (langelem) | |
| 3288 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close) | |
| 3289 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context)) | |
| 3290 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem)) | |
| 3291 (if (= (following-char) ?@{) | |
| 3292 (forward-sexp -1)) | |
| 3293 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]"))) | |
| 3294 '(before) | |
| 3295 '(before after))))) | |
| 3296 @end example | |
| 3297 | |
| 3298 @findex c-snug-do-while | |
| 3299 @findex snug-do-while (c-) | |
| 3300 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while'' | |
| 3301 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating | |
| 3302 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it. | |
| 3303 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so | |
| 3304 that the brace appears on a line by itself. | |
| 3305 | |
| 3306 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3307 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines | |
| 3308 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3309 @section Hanging Colons | |
| 3310 @cindex hanging colons | |
| 3311 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3312 | |
| 3313 @cindex customization, colon hanging | |
| 3314 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist | |
| 3315 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-) | |
| 3316 | |
| 3317 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}), | |
| 3318 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable | |
| 3319 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} - When a colon is typed, @ccmode | |
| 3320 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist | |
| 3321 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines | |
| 3322 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a | |
| 3323 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the | |
| 3324 newly typed colon. | |
| 3325 | |
| 3326 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist | |
| 3327 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-) | |
| 3328 | |
| 3329 @table @asis | |
| 3330 @item The Key - the syntactic symbol | |
| 3331 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list | |
| 3332 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label}, | |
| 3333 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic | |
| 3334 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored. | |
| 3335 | |
| 3336 @item The associate value - the ``ACTION'' list | |
| 3337 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the | |
| 3338 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in | |
| 3339 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not | |
| 3340 supported - there doesn't seem to be any need for them. | |
| 3341 @end table | |
| 3342 @end defopt | |
| 3343 | |
| 3344 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these | |
| 3345 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after | |
| 3346 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in | |
| 3347 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details. | |
| 3348 | |
| 3349 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3350 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines | |
| 3351 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3352 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas | |
| 3353 @cindex hanging semicolons | |
| 3354 @cindex hanging commas | |
| 3355 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines | |
| 3356 @cindex customization, comma newlines | |
| 3357 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3358 | |
| 3359 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria | |
| 3360 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-) | |
| 3361 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when | |
| 3362 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order | |
| 3363 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just | |
| 3364 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve | |
| 3365 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the | |
| 3366 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context | |
| 3367 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{} | |
| 3368 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines | |
| 3369 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so. | |
| 3370 They should return one of the following values: | |
| 3371 | |
| 3372 @table @code | |
| 3373 @item t | |
| 3374 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no | |
| 3375 more functions from the list are to be called. | |
| 3376 @item stop | |
| 3377 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to | |
| 3378 be inserted. | |
| 3379 @item nil | |
| 3380 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is | |
| 3381 to be called. | |
| 3382 @end table | |
| 3383 | |
| 3384 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon | |
| 3385 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a | |
| 3386 determination being made, then no newline is added. | |
| 3387 | |
| 3388 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the | |
| 3389 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function, | |
| 3390 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all | |
| 3391 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements. | |
| 3392 @end defopt | |
| 3393 | |
| 3394 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks | |
| 3395 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-) | |
| 3396 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It | |
| 3397 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a | |
| 3398 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To | |
| 3399 use, add this function to the front of the | |
| 3400 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list. | |
| 3401 | |
| 3402 @example | |
| 3403 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks () | |
| 3404 (save-excursion | |
| 3405 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;) | |
| 3406 (zerop (forward-line 1)) | |
| 3407 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$"))) | |
| 3408 'stop | |
| 3409 nil))) | |
| 3410 @end example | |
| 3411 @end defun | |
| 3412 | |
| 3413 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist | |
| 3414 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-) | |
| 3415 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners | |
| 3416 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-) | |
| 3417 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents | |
| 3418 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for} | |
| 3419 statements. In addition to | |
| 3420 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above, | |
| 3421 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function | |
| 3422 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses | |
| 3423 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions | |
| 3424 (e.g. in C++ or Java). | |
| 3425 @end defun | |
| 3426 | |
| 3427 | |
| 3428 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3429 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top | |
| 3430 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3431 @chapter Clean-ups | |
| 3432 @cindex clean-ups | |
| 3433 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3434 | |
| 3435 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add) | |
| 3436 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon | |
| 3437 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into | |
| 3438 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g. like this: | |
| 3439 | |
| 3440 @example | |
| 3441 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall) | |
| 3442 @end example | |
| 3443 | |
| 3444 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality | |
| 3445 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups, | |
| 3446 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e. to adjust | |
| 3447 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed. | |
| 3448 | |
| 3449 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are | |
| 3450 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will | |
| 3451 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there | |
| 3452 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components | |
| 3453 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the | |
| 3454 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}). | |
| 3455 | |
| 3456 @defopt c-cleanup-list | |
| 3457 @vindex cleanup-list (c-) | |
| 3458 @cindex literal | |
| 3459 | |
| 3460 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable | |
| 3461 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By | |
| 3462 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct, | |
| 3463 which is necessary for proper C++ support. | |
| 3464 @end defopt | |
| 3465 | |
| 3466 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and | |
| 3467 auto-newline minor modes are enabled: | |
| 3468 | |
| 3469 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a | |
| 3470 @c bit too much in dvi output. | |
| 3471 @table @code | |
| 3472 @item brace-else-brace | |
| 3473 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on | |
| 3474 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the | |
| 3475 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this: | |
| 3476 | |
| 3477 @example | |
| 3478 @group | |
| 3479 void spam(int i) | |
| 3480 @{ | |
| 3481 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3482 dosomething(); | |
| 3483 @} | |
| 3484 else | |
| 3485 @{ | |
| 3486 @end group | |
| 3487 @end example | |
| 3488 | |
| 3489 @noindent | |
| 3490 appears like this after the last open brace is typed: | |
| 3491 | |
| 3492 @example | |
| 3493 @group | |
| 3494 void spam(int i) | |
| 3495 @{ | |
| 3496 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3497 dosomething(); | |
| 3498 @} else @{ | |
| 3499 @end group | |
| 3500 @end example | |
| 3501 | |
| 3502 @item brace-elseif-brace | |
| 3503 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up | |
| 3504 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example: | |
| 3505 | |
| 3506 @example | |
| 3507 @group | |
| 3508 void spam(int i) | |
| 3509 @{ | |
| 3510 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3511 dosomething(); | |
| 3512 @} | |
| 3513 else if( i==3 ) | |
| 3514 @{ | |
| 3515 @end group | |
| 3516 @end example | |
| 3517 | |
| 3518 @noindent | |
| 3519 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed: | |
| 3520 | |
| 3521 @example | |
| 3522 @group | |
| 3523 void spam(int i) | |
| 3524 @{ | |
| 3525 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3526 dosomething(); | |
| 3527 @} else if( | |
| 3528 @end group | |
| 3529 @end example | |
| 3530 | |
| 3531 @noindent | |
| 3532 and like this after the last open brace is typed: | |
| 3533 | |
| 3534 @example | |
| 3535 @group | |
| 3536 void spam(int i) | |
| 3537 @{ | |
| 3538 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3539 dosomething(); | |
| 3540 @} else if( i==3 ) @{ | |
| 3541 @end group | |
| 3542 @end example | |
| 3543 | |
| 3544 @item brace-catch-brace | |
| 3545 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch | |
| 3546 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode. | |
| 3547 | |
| 3548 @item empty-defun-braces | |
| 3549 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that | |
| 3550 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed. | |
| 3551 Thus the following: | |
| 3552 | |
| 3553 @example | |
| 3554 @group | |
| 3555 class Spam | |
| 3556 @{ | |
| 3557 @} | |
| 3558 @end group | |
| 3559 @end example | |
| 3560 | |
| 3561 @noindent | |
| 3562 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed: | |
| 3563 | |
| 3564 @example | |
| 3565 @group | |
| 3566 class Spam | |
| 3567 @{@} | |
| 3568 @end group | |
| 3569 @end example | |
| 3570 | |
| 3571 @item defun-close-semi | |
| 3572 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class | |
| 3573 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the | |
| 3574 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following: | |
| 3575 | |
| 3576 @example | |
| 3577 @group | |
| 3578 class Spam | |
| 3579 @{ | |
| 3580 ... | |
| 3581 @} | |
| 3582 ; | |
| 3583 @end group | |
| 3584 @end example | |
| 3585 | |
| 3586 @noindent | |
| 3587 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed: | |
| 3588 | |
| 3589 @example | |
| 3590 @group | |
| 3591 class Spam | |
| 3592 @{ | |
| 3593 ... | |
| 3594 @}; | |
| 3595 @end group | |
| 3596 @end example | |
| 3597 | |
| 3598 @item list-close-comma | |
| 3599 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers. | |
| 3600 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma | |
| 3601 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in | |
| 3602 @code{defun-close-semi}. | |
| 3603 | |
| 3604 @item scope-operator | |
| 3605 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split | |
| 3606 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce | |
| 3607 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not | |
| 3608 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers | |
| 3609 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is | |
| 3610 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the | |
| 3611 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code. | |
| 3612 | |
| 3613 @item one-liner-defun | |
| 3614 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing | |
| 3615 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when | |
| 3616 the closing brace is typed. If the variable | |
| 3617 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the | |
| 3618 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable. | |
| 3619 | |
| 3620 For example, consider this AWK code: | |
| 3621 | |
| 3622 @example | |
| 3623 @group | |
| 3624 BEGIN @{ | |
| 3625 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator | |
| 3626 @} | |
| 3627 @end group | |
| 3628 @end example | |
| 3629 | |
| 3630 @noindent | |
| 3631 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed: | |
| 3632 | |
| 3633 @example | |
| 3634 @group | |
| 3635 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator | |
| 3636 @end group | |
| 3637 @end example | |
| 3638 | |
| 3639 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length | |
| 3640 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-) | |
| 3641 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up | |
| 3642 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire | |
| 3643 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its | |
| 3644 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit | |
| 3645 applies. | |
| 3646 @end defopt | |
| 3647 @end table | |
| 3648 | |
| 3649 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on | |
| 3650 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or | |
| 3651 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled: | |
| 3652 | |
| 3653 @table @code | |
| 3654 @item space-before-funcall | |
| 3655 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis | |
| 3656 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style | |
| 3657 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g. @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT, | |
| 3658 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening | |
| 3659 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK | |
| 3660 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined | |
| 3661 functions. | |
| 3662 | |
| 3663 @item compact-empty-funcall | |
| 3664 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis | |
| 3665 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used | |
| 3666 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function | |
| 3667 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when | |
| 3668 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e. you will get @samp{signal | |
| 3669 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the | |
| 3670 closing parenthesis is typed. | |
| 3671 | |
| 3672 @item comment-close-slash | |
| 3673 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash | |
| 3674 at the beginning of a line (i.e. immediately after the comment prefix). | |
| 3675 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed, | |
| 3676 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this | |
| 3677 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted. | |
| 3678 @end table | |
| 3679 | |
| 3680 | |
| 3681 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3682 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top | |
| 3683 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3684 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 3685 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3686 | |
| 3687 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code. | |
| 3688 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that | |
| 3689 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding | |
| 3690 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}. | |
| 3691 | |
| 3692 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and | |
| 3693 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents | |
| 3694 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps: | |
| 3695 | |
| 3696 @enumerate | |
| 3697 @item | |
| 3698 @cindex syntactic symbol | |
| 3699 @cindex anchor position | |
| 3700 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the | |
| 3701 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor | |
| 3702 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent | |
| 3703 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of | |
| 3704 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic | |
| 3705 Analysis}. | |
| 3706 @item | |
| 3707 @cindex offsets | |
| 3708 @cindex indentation offset specifications | |
| 3709 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the | |
| 3710 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means | |
| 3711 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{} | |
| 3712 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the | |
| 3713 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are | |
| 3714 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. | |
| 3715 @end enumerate | |
| 3716 | |
| 3717 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation | |
| 3718 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable | |
| 3719 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set | |
| 3720 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}). | |
| 3721 | |
| 3722 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation | |
| 3723 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-) | |
| 3724 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation | |
| 3725 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's | |
| 3726 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the | |
| 3727 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the | |
| 3728 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style | |
| 3729 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any | |
| 3730 of the variables associated with indentation, not even | |
| 3731 @code{c-special-indent-hook}. | |
| 3732 @end defopt | |
| 3733 | |
| 3734 @menu | |
| 3735 * Syntactic Analysis:: | |
| 3736 * Syntactic Symbols:: | |
| 3737 * Indentation Calculation:: | |
| 3738 @end menu | |
| 3739 | |
| 3740 | |
| 3741 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3742 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 3743 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3744 @section Syntactic Analysis | |
| 3745 @cindex syntactic analysis | |
| 3746 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3747 | |
| 3748 @cindex syntactic element | |
| 3749 @cindex syntactic context | |
| 3750 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to | |
| 3751 analyze the line, determining the @dfn{syntactic context} of the | |
| 3752 (first) construct on that line. It's a list of @dfn{syntactic | |
| 3753 elements}, where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In | |
| 3754 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the | |
| 3755 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position. | |
| 3756 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function | |
| 3757 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a | |
| 3758 brief and typical example: | |
| 3759 | |
| 3760 @example | |
| 3761 ((defun-block-intro 1959)) | |
| 3762 @end example | |
| 3763 | |
| 3764 @cindex syntactic symbol | |
| 3765 @noindent | |
| 3766 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a | |
| 3767 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was | |
| 3768 recognized, e.g. @code{statement}, @code{substatement}, | |
| 3769 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols}, | |
| 3770 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and | |
| 3771 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated | |
| 3772 with the recognized construct - there might be zero or more. | |
| 3773 | |
| 3774 @cindex anchor position | |
| 3775 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some | |
| 3776 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the | |
| 3777 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the | |
| 3778 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in | |
| 3779 the syntactic element list then it's either nil or that anchor position. | |
| 3780 | |
| 3781 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing | |
| 3782 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples | |
| 3783 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}: | |
| 3784 | |
| 3785 @example | |
| 3786 1: void swap( int& a, int& b ) | |
| 3787 2: @{ | |
| 3788 3: int tmp = a; | |
| 3789 4: a = b; | |
| 3790 5: b = tmp; | |
| 3791 6: @} | |
| 3792 @end example | |
| 3793 | |
| 3794 @noindent | |
| 3795 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to | |
| 3796 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line: | |
| 3797 | |
| 3798 @table @asis | |
| 3799 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) | |
| 3800 @kindex C-c C-s | |
| 3801 @findex c-show-syntactic-information | |
| 3802 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-) | |
| 3803 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and | |
| 3804 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor | |
| 3805 position(s). | |
| 3806 @end table | |
| 3807 | |
| 3808 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo | |
| 3809 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e. @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the | |
| 3810 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current | |
| 3811 line.}: | |
| 3812 | |
| 3813 @example | |
| 3814 ((statement 35)) | |
| 3815 @end example | |
| 3816 | |
| 3817 @noindent | |
| 3818 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This | |
| 3819 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to | |
| 3820 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move | |
| 3821 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see: | |
| 3822 | |
| 3823 @example | |
| 3824 ((defun-block-intro 29)) | |
| 3825 @end example | |
| 3826 | |
| 3827 @noindent | |
| 3828 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top | |
| 3829 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29, | |
| 3830 which is the brace just after the function header. | |
| 3831 | |
| 3832 Here's another example: | |
| 3833 | |
| 3834 @example | |
| 3835 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 3836 2: @{ | |
| 3837 3: if( doit ) | |
| 3838 4: @{ | |
| 3839 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 3840 6: @} | |
| 3841 7: return( val ); | |
| 3842 8: @} | |
| 3843 @end example | |
| 3844 | |
| 3845 @noindent | |
| 3846 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us: | |
| 3847 | |
| 3848 @example | |
| 3849 ((substatement-open 46)) | |
| 3850 @end example | |
| 3851 | |
| 3852 @cindex substatement | |
| 3853 @cindex substatement block | |
| 3854 @noindent | |
| 3855 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement | |
| 3856 block. @footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a | |
| 3857 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while}, | |
| 3858 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement | |
| 3859 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.} | |
| 3860 | |
| 3861 @cindex comment-only line | |
| 3862 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic | |
| 3863 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of | |
| 3864 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}: | |
| 3865 | |
| 3866 @example | |
| 3867 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables ) | |
| 3868 2: @{ | |
| 3869 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list | |
| 3870 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i ) | |
| 3871 5: @{ | |
| 3872 6: drawables[i].draw(); | |
| 3873 7: @} | |
| 3874 8: @} | |
| 3875 @end example | |
| 3876 | |
| 3877 @noindent | |
| 3878 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives: | |
| 3879 | |
| 3880 @example | |
| 3881 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46)) | |
| 3882 @end example | |
| 3883 | |
| 3884 @noindent | |
| 3885 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic | |
| 3886 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no | |
| 3887 anchor position. | |
| 3888 | |
| 3889 | |
| 3890 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3891 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 3892 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3893 @section Syntactic Symbols | |
| 3894 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3895 | |
| 3896 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list | |
| 3897 @vindex c-offsets-alist | |
| 3898 @vindex offsets-alist (c-) | |
| 3899 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear | |
| 3900 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief | |
| 3901 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}) | |
| 3902 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses | |
| 3903 them. | |
| 3904 | |
| 3905 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of | |
| 3906 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the | |
| 3907 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor | |
| 3908 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not} | |
| 3909 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent | |
| 3910 line---this highlights the anchor position. | |
| 3911 | |
| 3912 @ssindex -open symbols | |
| 3913 @ssindex -close symbols | |
| 3914 @ssindex -block-intro symbols | |
| 3915 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general | |
| 3916 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace, | |
| 3917 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or | |
| 3918 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block | |
| 3919 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}. | |
| 3920 | |
| 3921 @ssindex -intro symbols | |
| 3922 @ssindex -cont symbols | |
| 3923 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually | |
| 3924 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the | |
| 3925 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these | |
| 3926 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont} | |
| 3927 respectively. | |
| 3928 | |
| 3929 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some | |
| 3930 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code | |
| 3931 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}. | |
| 3932 | |
| 3933 @table @code | |
| 3934 @item string | |
| 3935 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 3936 @item c | |
| 3937 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 3938 @item defun-open | |
| 3939 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function | |
| 3940 Symbols}. | |
| 3941 @item defun-close | |
| 3942 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function | |
| 3943 Symbols}. | |
| 3944 @item defun-block-intro | |
| 3945 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 3946 @item class-open | |
| 3947 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3948 @item class-close | |
| 3949 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3950 @item inline-open | |
| 3951 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3952 @item inline-close | |
| 3953 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3954 @item func-decl-cont | |
| 3955 The region between a function definition's argument list and the | |
| 3956 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C, | |
| 3957 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region, | |
| 3958 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things | |
| 3959 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not | |
| 3960 @c go somewhere better?} | |
| 3961 @item knr-argdecl-intro | |
| 3962 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}. | |
| 3963 @item knr-argdecl | |
| 3964 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}. | |
| 3965 @item topmost-intro | |
| 3966 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 3967 @item topmost-intro-cont | |
| 3968 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts | |
| 3969 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and | |
| 3970 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 3971 @item member-init-intro | |
| 3972 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3973 @item member-init-cont | |
| 3974 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3975 @item inher-intro | |
| 3976 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3977 @item inher-cont | |
| 3978 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3979 @item block-open | |
| 3980 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 3981 @item block-close | |
| 3982 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 3983 @item brace-list-open | |
| 3984 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}. | |
| 3985 @item brace-list-close | |
| 3986 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}. | |
| 3987 @item brace-list-intro | |
| 3988 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}. | |
| 3989 @item brace-list-entry | |
| 3990 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List | |
| 3991 Symbols}. | |
| 3992 @item brace-entry-open | |
| 3993 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins | |
| 3994 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}. | |
| 3995 @item statement | |
| 3996 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 3997 @item statement-cont | |
| 3998 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 3999 @item statement-block-intro | |
| 4000 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct | |
| 4001 Symbols}. | |
| 4002 @item statement-case-intro | |
| 4003 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}. | |
| 4004 @item statement-case-open | |
| 4005 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch | |
| 4006 Statement Symbols}. | |
| 4007 @item substatement | |
| 4008 The first line after a conditional or loop construct. | |
| 4009 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 4010 @item substatement-open | |
| 4011 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct | |
| 4012 Symbols}. | |
| 4013 @item substatement-label | |
| 4014 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label. | |
| 4015 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 4016 @item case-label | |
| 4017 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}. | |
| 4018 @item access-label | |
| 4019 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 4020 @item label | |
| 4021 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 4022 @item do-while-closure | |
| 4023 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct. | |
| 4024 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 4025 @item else-clause | |
| 4026 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct. | |
| 4027 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 4028 @item catch-clause | |
| 4029 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a | |
| 4030 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct | |
| 4031 Symbols}. | |
| 4032 @item comment-intro | |
| 4033 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 4034 @item arglist-intro | |
| 4035 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}. | |
| 4036 @item arglist-cont | |
| 4037 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same | |
| 4038 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}. | |
| 4039 @item arglist-cont-nonempty | |
| 4040 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on | |
| 4041 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}. | |
| 4042 @item arglist-close | |
| 4043 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}. | |
| 4044 @item stream-op | |
| 4045 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal | |
| 4046 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?} | |
| 4047 @item inclass | |
| 4048 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 4049 @item cpp-macro | |
| 4050 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 4051 @item cpp-define-intro | |
| 4052 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if | |
| 4053 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro | |
| 4054 Symbols}. | |
| 4055 @item cpp-macro-cont | |
| 4056 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if | |
| 4057 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}. | |
| 4058 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}. | |
| 4059 @item friend | |
| 4060 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 4061 @item objc-method-intro | |
| 4062 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C | |
| 4063 Method Symbols}. | |
| 4064 @item objc-method-args-cont | |
| 4065 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C | |
| 4066 Method Symbols}. | |
| 4067 @item objc-method-call-cont | |
| 4068 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method | |
| 4069 Symbols}. | |
| 4070 @item extern-lang-open | |
| 4071 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g. @code{extern "C" | |
| 4072 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4073 @item extern-lang-close | |
| 4074 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope | |
| 4075 Symbols}. | |
| 4076 @item inextern-lang | |
| 4077 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside | |
| 4078 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4079 @item namespace-open | |
| 4080 @itemx namespace-close | |
| 4081 @itemx innamespace | |
| 4082 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but | |
| 4083 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4084 @item module-open | |
| 4085 @itemx module-close | |
| 4086 @itemx inmodule | |
| 4087 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks. | |
| 4088 @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4089 @item composition-open | |
| 4090 @itemx composition-close | |
| 4091 @itemx incomposition | |
| 4092 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks. | |
| 4093 @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4094 @item template-args-cont | |
| 4095 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 4096 @item inlambda | |
| 4097 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda | |
| 4098 (i.e. anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement | |
| 4099 Block Symbols}. | |
| 4100 @item lambda-intro-cont | |
| 4101 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e. between the | |
| 4102 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode. | |
| 4103 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}. | |
| 4104 @item inexpr-statement | |
| 4105 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension | |
| 4106 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that | |
| 4107 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block | |
| 4108 Symbols}. | |
| 4109 @item inexpr-class | |
| 4110 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous | |
| 4111 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in | |
| 4112 Java. @ref{Anonymous Class Symbol}. | |
| 4113 @end table | |
| 4114 | |
| 4115 @menu | |
| 4116 * Function Symbols:: | |
| 4117 * Class Symbols:: | |
| 4118 * Conditional Construct Symbols:: | |
| 4119 * Switch Statement Symbols:: | |
| 4120 * Brace List Symbols:: | |
| 4121 * External Scope Symbols:: | |
| 4122 * Paren List Symbols:: | |
| 4123 * Literal Symbols:: | |
| 4124 * Multiline Macro Symbols:: | |
| 4125 * Objective-C Method Symbols:: | |
| 4126 * Anonymous Class Symbol:: | |
| 4127 * Statement Block Symbols:: | |
| 4128 * K&R Symbols:: | |
| 4129 @end menu | |
| 4130 | |
| 4131 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4132 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4133 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4134 @subsection Function Symbols | |
| 4135 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4136 | |
| 4137 This example shows a typical function declaration. | |
| 4138 | |
| 4139 @example | |
| 4140 1: void | |
| 4141 2: swap( int& a, int& b ) | |
| 4142 3: @{ | |
| 4143 4: int tmp = a; | |
| 4144 5: a = b; | |
| 4145 6: b = tmp; | |
| 4146 7: int ignored = | |
| 4147 8: a + b; | |
| 4148 9: @} | |
| 4149 @end example | |
| 4150 | |
| 4151 @ssindex topmost-intro | |
| 4152 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont | |
| 4153 @ssindex defun-open | |
| 4154 @ssindex defun-close | |
| 4155 @ssindex defun-block-intro | |
| 4156 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that | |
| 4157 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the | |
| 4158 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax | |
| 4159 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is | |
| 4160 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the | |
| 4161 corresponding | |
| 4162 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level | |
| 4163 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e. it is | |
| 4164 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a | |
| 4165 top-level function definition. | |
| 4166 | |
| 4167 @ssindex statement | |
| 4168 @ssindex statement-cont | |
| 4169 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there | |
| 4170 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given | |
| 4171 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun | |
| 4172 on the previous line. | |
| 4173 | |
| 4174 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4175 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4176 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4177 @subsection Class related Symbols | |
| 4178 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4179 | |
| 4180 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols: | |
| 4181 | |
| 4182 @example | |
| 4183 1: class Bass | |
| 4184 2: : public Guitar, | |
| 4185 3: public Amplifiable | |
| 4186 4: @{ | |
| 4187 5: public: | |
| 4188 6: Bass() | |
| 4189 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )), | |
| 4190 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )), | |
| 4191 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )), | |
| 4192 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 )) | |
| 4193 11: @{ | |
| 4194 12: eString.tune( 'E' ); | |
| 4195 13: aString.tune( 'A' ); | |
| 4196 14: dString.tune( 'D' ); | |
| 4197 15: gString.tune( 'G' ); | |
| 4198 16: @} | |
| 4199 17: friend class Luthier; | |
| 4200 18: @}; | |
| 4201 @end example | |
| 4202 | |
| 4203 @ssindex class-open | |
| 4204 @ssindex class-close | |
| 4205 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax. | |
| 4206 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is | |
| 4207 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes, | |
| 4208 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are | |
| 4209 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the | |
| 4210 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a | |
| 4211 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even | |
| 4212 for C and Objective-C. For consistency, structs in all supported | |
| 4213 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that | |
| 4214 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}. | |
| 4215 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax. | |
| 4216 | |
| 4217 @ssindex inher-intro | |
| 4218 @ssindex inher-cont | |
| 4219 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned | |
| 4220 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the | |
| 4221 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax. | |
| 4222 | |
| 4223 @ssindex access-label | |
| 4224 @ssindex inclass | |
| 4225 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis: | |
| 4226 | |
| 4227 @example | |
| 4228 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58)) | |
| 4229 @end example | |
| 4230 | |
| 4231 @noindent | |
| 4232 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as | |
| 4233 this a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However, | |
| 4234 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class | |
| 4235 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The | |
| 4236 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}. | |
| 4237 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro} | |
| 4238 syntax: | |
| 4239 | |
| 4240 @example | |
| 4241 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60)) | |
| 4242 @end example | |
| 4243 | |
| 4244 @ssindex member-init-intro | |
| 4245 @ssindex member-init-cont | |
| 4246 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given | |
| 4247 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is | |
| 4248 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a | |
| 4249 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned | |
| 4250 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization | |
| 4251 list started on line 7. | |
| 4252 | |
| 4253 @cindex in-class inline methods | |
| 4254 @ssindex inline-open | |
| 4255 @ssindex inline-close | |
| 4256 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated: | |
| 4257 | |
| 4258 @example | |
| 4259 ((inclass 58) (inline-open)) | |
| 4260 @end example | |
| 4261 | |
| 4262 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and | |
| 4263 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method | |
| 4264 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an | |
| 4265 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class | |
| 4266 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined. | |
| 4267 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared | |
| 4268 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the | |
| 4269 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared | |
| 4270 before the method name, as in: | |
| 4271 | |
| 4272 @example | |
| 4273 1: class Bass | |
| 4274 2: : public Guitar, | |
| 4275 3: public Amplifiable | |
| 4276 4: @{ | |
| 4277 5: public: | |
| 4278 6: Bass(); | |
| 4279 7: @}; | |
| 4280 8: | |
| 4281 9: inline | |
| 4282 10: Bass::Bass() | |
| 4283 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )), | |
| 4284 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )), | |
| 4285 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )), | |
| 4286 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 )) | |
| 4287 15: @{ | |
| 4288 16: eString.tune( 'E' ); | |
| 4289 17: aString.tune( 'A' ); | |
| 4290 18: dString.tune( 'D' ); | |
| 4291 19: gString.tune( 'G' ); | |
| 4292 20: @} | |
| 4293 @end example | |
| 4294 | |
| 4295 @ssindex friend | |
| 4296 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close} | |
| 4297 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines | |
| 4298 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is | |
| 4299 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three | |
| 4300 elements: | |
| 4301 | |
| 4302 @example | |
| 4303 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend)) | |
| 4304 @end example | |
| 4305 | |
| 4306 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are | |
| 4307 modifiers that do not have anchor positions. | |
| 4308 | |
| 4309 @ssindex template-args-cont | |
| 4310 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol: | |
| 4311 | |
| 4312 @example | |
| 4313 1: ThingManager <int, | |
| 4314 2: Framework::Callback *, | |
| 4315 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks; | |
| 4316 @end example | |
| 4317 | |
| 4318 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3 | |
| 4319 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines. | |
| 4320 | |
| 4321 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4322 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4323 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4324 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols | |
| 4325 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4326 | |
| 4327 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is | |
| 4328 assigned to various conditional constructs: | |
| 4329 | |
| 4330 @example | |
| 4331 1: void spam( int index ) | |
| 4332 2: @{ | |
| 4333 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ ) | |
| 4334 4: @{ | |
| 4335 5: if( i == 10 ) | |
| 4336 6: do_something_special(); | |
| 4337 7: else | |
| 4338 8: silly_label: | |
| 4339 9: do_something( i ); | |
| 4340 10: @} | |
| 4341 11: do @{ | |
| 4342 12: another_thing( i-- ); | |
| 4343 13: @} | |
| 4344 14: while( i > 0 ); | |
| 4345 15: @} | |
| 4346 @end example | |
| 4347 | |
| 4348 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed. | |
| 4349 | |
| 4350 @ssindex substatement-open | |
| 4351 @ssindex statement-block-intro | |
| 4352 @ssindex block-close | |
| 4353 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It | |
| 4354 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is | |
| 4355 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned | |
| 4356 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace | |
| 4357 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the | |
| 4358 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for | |
| 4359 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal | |
| 4360 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way. | |
| 4361 | |
| 4362 @ssindex substatement | |
| 4363 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they | |
| 4364 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax | |
| 4365 instead of @code{substatement-open}. | |
| 4366 | |
| 4367 @ssindex substatement-label | |
| 4368 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax. | |
| 4369 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and | |
| 4370 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you | |
| 4371 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels. | |
| 4372 | |
| 4373 @ssindex else-clause | |
| 4374 @ssindex catch-clause | |
| 4375 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on | |
| 4376 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is | |
| 4377 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch} | |
| 4378 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that | |
| 4379 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with | |
| 4380 @code{catch-clause}. | |
| 4381 | |
| 4382 @ssindex do-while-closure | |
| 4383 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do} | |
| 4384 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it | |
| 4385 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on | |
| 4386 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have | |
| 4387 @code{block-close} syntax. | |
| 4388 | |
| 4389 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4390 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4391 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4392 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols | |
| 4393 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4394 | |
| 4395 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an | |
| 4396 example: | |
| 4397 | |
| 4398 @example | |
| 4399 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i ) | |
| 4400 2: @{ | |
| 4401 3: switch( i ) @{ | |
| 4402 4: case Ham: | |
| 4403 5: be_a_pig(); | |
| 4404 6: break; | |
| 4405 7: case Salt: | |
| 4406 8: drink_some_water(); | |
| 4407 9: break; | |
| 4408 10: default: | |
| 4409 11: @{ | |
| 4410 12: what_is_it(); | |
| 4411 13: break; | |
| 4412 14: @} | |
| 4413 15: @} | |
| 4414 14: @} | |
| 4415 @end example | |
| 4416 | |
| 4417 @ssindex case-label | |
| 4418 @ssindex statement-case-intro | |
| 4419 @ssindex statement-case-open | |
| 4420 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax, | |
| 4421 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11 | |
| 4422 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a | |
| 4423 block --- it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax. | |
| 4424 | |
| 4425 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4426 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4427 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4428 @subsection Brace List Symbols | |
| 4429 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4430 | |
| 4431 @cindex brace lists | |
| 4432 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize | |
| 4433 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an | |
| 4434 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically | |
| 4435 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs | |
| 4436 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as | |
| 4437 brace lists too. An example: | |
| 4438 | |
| 4439 @example | |
| 4440 1: static char* ingredients[] = | |
| 4441 2: @{ | |
| 4442 3: "Ham", | |
| 4443 4: "Salt", | |
| 4444 5: NULL | |
| 4445 6: @}; | |
| 4446 @end example | |
| 4447 | |
| 4448 @ssindex brace-list-open | |
| 4449 @ssindex brace-list-intro | |
| 4450 @ssindex brace-list-close | |
| 4451 @ssindex brace-list-entry | |
| 4452 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned | |
| 4453 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned | |
| 4454 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned | |
| 4455 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned | |
| 4456 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this | |
| 4457 initializer list. | |
| 4458 | |
| 4459 @ssindex brace-entry-open | |
| 4460 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for | |
| 4461 example: | |
| 4462 | |
| 4463 @example | |
| 4464 1: struct intpairs[] = | |
| 4465 2: @{ | |
| 4466 3: @{ 1, 2 @}, | |
| 4467 4: @{ | |
| 4468 5: 3, | |
| 4469 6: 4 | |
| 4470 7: @} | |
| 4471 8: @{ 1, | |
| 4472 9: 2 @}, | |
| 4473 10: @{ 3, 4 @} | |
| 4474 11: @}; | |
| 4475 @end example | |
| 4476 | |
| 4477 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On | |
| 4478 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned | |
| 4479 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry | |
| 4480 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are | |
| 4481 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd | |
| 4482 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is | |
| 4483 line 10. | |
| 4484 | |
| 4485 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4486 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4487 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4488 @subsection External Scope Symbols | |
| 4489 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4490 | |
| 4491 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic | |
| 4492 symbols. In this example: | |
| 4493 | |
| 4494 @example | |
| 4495 1: extern "C" | |
| 4496 2: @{ | |
| 4497 3: int thing_one( int ); | |
| 4498 4: int thing_two( double ); | |
| 4499 5: @} | |
| 4500 @end example | |
| 4501 | |
| 4502 @ssindex extern-lang-open | |
| 4503 @ssindex extern-lang-close | |
| 4504 @ssindex inextern-lang | |
| 4505 @ssindex inclass | |
| 4506 @noindent | |
| 4507 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given | |
| 4508 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields: | |
| 4509 | |
| 4510 @example | |
| 4511 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14)) | |
| 4512 @end example | |
| 4513 | |
| 4514 @noindent | |
| 4515 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to | |
| 4516 @code{inclass}. | |
| 4517 | |
| 4518 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they | |
| 4519 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after | |
| 4520 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g. C++ namespace blocks get | |
| 4521 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and | |
| 4522 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are: | |
| 4523 | |
| 4524 @table @asis | |
| 4525 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang} | |
| 4526 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be | |
| 4527 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but | |
| 4528 that isn't the case for historical reasons.} | |
| 4529 | |
| 4530 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace} | |
| 4531 @ssindex namespace-open | |
| 4532 @ssindex namespace-close | |
| 4533 @ssindex innamespace | |
| 4534 @code{namespace} blocks in C++. | |
| 4535 | |
| 4536 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule} | |
| 4537 @ssindex module-open | |
| 4538 @ssindex module-close | |
| 4539 @ssindex inmodule | |
| 4540 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL. | |
| 4541 | |
| 4542 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition} | |
| 4543 @ssindex composition-open | |
| 4544 @ssindex composition-close | |
| 4545 @ssindex incomposition | |
| 4546 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL. | |
| 4547 @end table | |
| 4548 | |
| 4549 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4550 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4551 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4552 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols | |
| 4553 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4554 | |
| 4555 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists, | |
| 4556 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function | |
| 4557 calls. This example illustrates these: | |
| 4558 | |
| 4559 @example | |
| 4560 1: void a_function( int line1, | |
| 4561 2: int line2 ); | |
| 4562 3: | |
| 4563 4: void a_longer_function( | |
| 4564 5: int line1, | |
| 4565 6: int line2 | |
| 4566 7: ); | |
| 4567 8: | |
| 4568 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 ) | |
| 4569 10: @{ | |
| 4570 11: a_function( | |
| 4571 12: line1, | |
| 4572 13: line2 | |
| 4573 14: ); | |
| 4574 15: | |
| 4575 16: a_longer_function( line1, | |
| 4576 17: line2 ); | |
| 4577 18: @} | |
| 4578 @end example | |
| 4579 | |
| 4580 @ssindex arglist-intro | |
| 4581 @ssindex arglist-close | |
| 4582 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are | |
| 4583 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are | |
| 4584 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis | |
| 4585 that closes the argument list. | |
| 4586 | |
| 4587 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty | |
| 4588 @ssindex arglist-cont | |
| 4589 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic | |
| 4590 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17 | |
| 4591 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means | |
| 4592 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the | |
| 4593 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open | |
| 4594 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned | |
| 4595 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens | |
| 4596 their argument lists is the last character on that line. | |
| 4597 | |
| 4598 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro}, | |
| 4599 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two | |
| 4600 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the | |
| 4601 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis. | |
| 4602 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up | |
| 4603 Functions}). | |
| 4604 | |
| 4605 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any | |
| 4606 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line, | |
| 4607 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead. | |
| 4608 | |
| 4609 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4610 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4611 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4612 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols | |
| 4613 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4614 | |
| 4615 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously | |
| 4616 covered are illustrated by this C++ example: | |
| 4617 | |
| 4618 @example | |
| 4619 1: void Bass::play( int volume ) | |
| 4620 2: const | |
| 4621 3: @{ | |
| 4622 4: /* this line starts a multiline | |
| 4623 5: * comment. This line should get `c' syntax */ | |
| 4624 6: | |
| 4625 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \ | |
| 4626 8: string. This line should get `string' syntax."; | |
| 4627 9: | |
| 4628 10: note: | |
| 4629 11: @{ | |
| 4630 12: #ifdef LOCK | |
| 4631 13: Lock acquire(); | |
| 4632 14: #endif // LOCK | |
| 4633 15: slap_pop(); | |
| 4634 16: cout << "I played " | |
| 4635 17: << "a note\n"; | |
| 4636 18: @} | |
| 4637 19: @} | |
| 4638 @end example | |
| 4639 | |
| 4640 The lines to note in this example include: | |
| 4641 | |
| 4642 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4643 @item | |
| 4644 @ssindex func-decl-cont | |
| 4645 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax. | |
| 4646 | |
| 4647 @item | |
| 4648 @ssindex comment-intro | |
| 4649 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and} | |
| 4650 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with | |
| 4651 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point --- It is always accompanied | |
| 4652 by another syntactic element which does have one. | |
| 4653 | |
| 4654 @item | |
| 4655 @ssindex c | |
| 4656 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax. | |
| 4657 | |
| 4658 @item | |
| 4659 @cindex syntactic whitespace | |
| 4660 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is | |
| 4661 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the | |
| 4662 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned | |
| 4663 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be | |
| 4664 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing | |
| 4665 code. | |
| 4666 | |
| 4667 @item | |
| 4668 @ssindex string | |
| 4669 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax. | |
| 4670 | |
| 4671 @item | |
| 4672 @ssindex label | |
| 4673 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax. | |
| 4674 | |
| 4675 @item | |
| 4676 @ssindex block-open | |
| 4677 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement} | |
| 4678 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor | |
| 4679 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which | |
| 4680 does have one. | |
| 4681 | |
| 4682 @item | |
| 4683 @ssindex cpp-macro | |
| 4684 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the | |
| 4685 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and | |
| 4686 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is | |
| 4687 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all | |
| 4688 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily | |
| 4689 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest | |
| 4690 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with | |
| 4691 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position. | |
| 4692 | |
| 4693 @item | |
| 4694 @ssindex stream-op | |
| 4695 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax. | |
| 4696 @end itemize | |
| 4697 | |
| 4698 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4699 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4700 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4701 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols | |
| 4702 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4703 | |
| 4704 @cindex multiline macros | |
| 4705 @cindex syntactic whitespace | |
| 4706 @ssindex cpp-define-intro | |
| 4707 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont | |
| 4708 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like | |
| 4709 other code, i.e. the lines inside them are indented according to the | |
| 4710 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first | |
| 4711 line inside a macro definition (i.e. the line after the starting line of | |
| 4712 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example: | |
| 4713 | |
| 4714 @example | |
| 4715 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \ | |
| 4716 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \ | |
| 4717 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \ | |
| 4718 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \ | |
| 4719 5: else | |
| 4720 @end example | |
| 4721 | |
| 4722 @noindent | |
| 4723 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line | |
| 4724 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given | |
| 4725 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole | |
| 4726 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal | |
| 4727 code, i.e. @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause} | |
| 4728 on line 5. | |
| 4729 | |
| 4730 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with | |
| 4731 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In | |
| 4732 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont} | |
| 4733 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp | |
| 4734 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed | |
| 4735 macros.}. | |
| 4736 | |
| 4737 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros. | |
| 4738 | |
| 4739 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4740 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Anonymous Class Symbol, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4741 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4742 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols | |
| 4743 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4744 | |
| 4745 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols | |
| 4746 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example | |
| 4747 illustrating these: | |
| 4748 | |
| 4749 @example | |
| 4750 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject | |
| 4751 2: withStuff:stuff | |
| 4752 3: @{ | |
| 4753 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self | |
| 4754 5: toDelegate:anObject | |
| 4755 6: withExtraStuff:stuff]; | |
| 4756 7: @} | |
| 4757 @end example | |
| 4758 | |
| 4759 @ssindex objc-method-intro | |
| 4760 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont | |
| 4761 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont | |
| 4762 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is | |
| 4763 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both | |
| 4764 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax. | |
| 4765 | |
| 4766 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4767 @node Anonymous Class Symbol, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4768 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4769 @subsection Anonymous Class Symbol (Java) | |
| 4770 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4771 | |
| 4772 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like | |
| 4773 this: | |
| 4774 | |
| 4775 @example | |
| 4776 1: public void watch(Observable o) @{ | |
| 4777 2: o.addObserver(new Observer() @{ | |
| 4778 3: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{ | |
| 4779 4: history.addElement(arg); | |
| 4780 5: @} | |
| 4781 6: @}); | |
| 4782 7: @} | |
| 4783 @end example | |
| 4784 | |
| 4785 @ssindex inexpr-class | |
| 4786 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class. | |
| 4787 Lines 3 and 6 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the | |
| 4788 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be | |
| 4789 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to | |
| 4790 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't | |
| 4791 have an anchor position. | |
| 4792 | |
| 4793 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4794 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Anonymous Class Symbol, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4795 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4796 @subsection Statement Block Symbols | |
| 4797 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4798 | |
| 4799 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside | |
| 4800 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for | |
| 4801 this, e.g: | |
| 4802 | |
| 4803 @example | |
| 4804 1: int res = (@{ | |
| 4805 2: int y = foo (); int z; | |
| 4806 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y; | |
| 4807 4: z; | |
| 4808 5: @}); | |
| 4809 @end example | |
| 4810 | |
| 4811 @ssindex inexpr-statement | |
| 4812 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the | |
| 4813 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on | |
| 4814 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block | |
| 4815 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't | |
| 4816 contain an anchor position. | |
| 4817 | |
| 4818 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside | |
| 4819 statements, as illustrated here: | |
| 4820 | |
| 4821 @example | |
| 4822 1: array itgob() | |
| 4823 2: @{ | |
| 4824 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..], | |
| 4825 4: lambda | |
| 4826 5: (mixed arg) | |
| 4827 6: @{ | |
| 4828 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg); | |
| 4829 8: @}) * ", " + "\n"; | |
| 4830 9: return catch @{ | |
| 4831 10: write (s + "\n"); | |
| 4832 11: @}; | |
| 4833 12: @} | |
| 4834 @end example | |
| 4835 | |
| 4836 @ssindex inlambda | |
| 4837 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont | |
| 4838 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes | |
| 4839 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put | |
| 4840 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont} | |
| 4841 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the | |
| 4842 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line | |
| 4843 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets | |
| 4844 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get | |
| 4845 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the | |
| 4846 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the | |
| 4847 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace | |
| 4848 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}. | |
| 4849 | |
| 4850 @ssindex inexpr-statement | |
| 4851 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block | |
| 4852 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement | |
| 4853 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C | |
| 4854 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is | |
| 4855 handled like this too. | |
| 4856 | |
| 4857 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4858 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4859 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4860 @subsection K&R Symbols | |
| 4861 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4862 | |
| 4863 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro | |
| 4864 @ssindex knr-argdecl | |
| 4865 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C | |
| 4866 code @footnote{a.k.a. K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}: | |
| 4867 | |
| 4868 @example | |
| 4869 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c) | |
| 4870 2: int a; | |
| 4871 3: int b; | |
| 4872 4: int c; | |
| 4873 5: @{ | |
| 4874 6: return a + b + c; | |
| 4875 7: @} | |
| 4876 @end example | |
| 4877 | |
| 4878 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is | |
| 4879 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines | |
| 4880 (i.e. lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl} | |
| 4881 syntax. | |
| 4882 | |
| 4883 | |
| 4884 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4885 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 4886 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4887 @section Indentation Calculation | |
| 4888 @cindex indentation | |
| 4889 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4890 | |
| 4891 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context | |
| 4892 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). | |
| 4893 | |
| 4894 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the | |
| 4895 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first | |
| 4896 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic | |
| 4897 element has an anchor position then column zero is used. | |
| 4898 | |
| 4899 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up | |
| 4900 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable | |
| 4901 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic | |
| 4902 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are | |
| 4903 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation | |
| 4904 column. | |
| 4905 | |
| 4906 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is | |
| 4907 our first example again: | |
| 4908 | |
| 4909 @example | |
| 4910 1: void swap( int& a, int& b ) | |
| 4911 2: @{ | |
| 4912 3: int tmp = a; | |
| 4913 4: a = b; | |
| 4914 5: b = tmp; | |
| 4915 6: @} | |
| 4916 @end example | |
| 4917 | |
| 4918 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent | |
| 4919 the line. The syntactic context for that line is: | |
| 4920 | |
| 4921 @example | |
| 4922 ((defun-block-intro 29)) | |
| 4923 @end example | |
| 4924 | |
| 4925 @noindent | |
| 4926 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the | |
| 4927 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace | |
| 4928 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column. | |
| 4929 | |
| 4930 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the | |
| 4931 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value | |
| 4932 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running | |
| 4933 total indentation of 4 spaces. | |
| 4934 | |
| 4935 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line, | |
| 4936 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the | |
| 4937 line is 4 spaces. | |
| 4938 | |
| 4939 Here's another example: | |
| 4940 | |
| 4941 @example | |
| 4942 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 4943 2: @{ | |
| 4944 3: if( doit ) | |
| 4945 4: @{ | |
| 4946 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 4947 6: @} | |
| 4948 7: return( val ); | |
| 4949 8: @} | |
| 4950 @end example | |
| 4951 | |
| 4952 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same | |
| 4953 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic | |
| 4954 context. The context for this line is: | |
| 4955 | |
| 4956 @example | |
| 4957 ((substatement-open 46)) | |
| 4958 @end example | |
| 4959 | |
| 4960 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in | |
| 4961 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that | |
| 4962 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the | |
| 4963 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it | |
| 4964 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an | |
| 4965 indentation for the line of 8 spaces. | |
| 4966 | |
| 4967 Simple, huh? | |
| 4968 | |
| 4969 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on | |
| 4970 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets. | |
| 4971 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story. | |
| 4972 | |
| 4973 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to | |
| 4974 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation, | |
| 4975 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used. | |
| 4976 | |
| 4977 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable | |
| 4978 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the | |
| 4979 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the | |
| 4980 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}. | |
| 4981 | |
| 4982 | |
| 4983 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4984 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top | |
| 4985 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4986 @chapter Customizing Indentation | |
| 4987 @cindex customization, indentation | |
| 4988 @cindex indentation | |
| 4989 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4990 | |
| 4991 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style | |
| 4992 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an | |
| 4993 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and | |
| 4994 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The | |
| 4995 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the | |
| 4996 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its | |
| 4997 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}. | |
| 4998 | |
| 4999 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in | |
| 5000 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of | |
| 5001 @code{c-basic-offset}: | |
| 5002 | |
| 5003 @defopt c-basic-offset | |
| 5004 @vindex basic-offset (c-) | |
| 5005 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels. | |
| 5006 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it | |
| 5007 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for | |
| 5008 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles). | |
| 5009 @end defopt | |
| 5010 | |
| 5011 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in | |
| 5012 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them), | |
| 5013 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one | |
| 5014 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}). | |
| 5015 | |
| 5016 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last | |
| 5017 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You | |
| 5018 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's | |
| 5019 indentation. | |
| 5020 | |
| 5021 @menu | |
| 5022 * c-offsets-alist:: | |
| 5023 * Interactive Customization:: | |
| 5024 * Line-Up Functions:: | |
| 5025 * Custom Line-Up:: | |
| 5026 * Other Indentation:: | |
| 5027 @end menu | |
| 5028 | |
| 5029 | |
| 5030 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5031 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation | |
| 5032 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5033 @section c-offsets-alist | |
| 5034 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5035 | |
| 5036 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style | |
| 5037 variable @code{c-offset-alist}, the principal variable for configuring | |
| 5038 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to | |
| 5039 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}. | |
| 5040 | |
| 5041 @defopt c-offsets-alist | |
| 5042 @vindex offsets-alist (c-) | |
| 5043 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic | |
| 5044 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line | |
| 5045 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic | |
| 5046 Analysis}. | |
| 5047 | |
| 5048 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer | |
| 5049 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global | |
| 5050 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain | |
| 5051 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}. | |
| 5052 | |
| 5053 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic | |
| 5054 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or | |
| 5055 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols: | |
| 5056 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The | |
| 5057 meanings of these values are described in detail below. | |
| 5058 | |
| 5059 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some | |
| 5060 of these kinds of offsets: | |
| 5061 | |
| 5062 @example | |
| 5063 ((statement . 0) | |
| 5064 (substatement . +) | |
| 5065 (cpp-macro . [0]) | |
| 5066 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont) | |
| 5067 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block | |
| 5068 c-indent-multi-line-block)) | |
| 5069 @dots{} | |
| 5070 @*) | |
| 5071 @end example | |
| 5072 @end defopt | |
| 5073 | |
| 5074 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o}) | |
| 5075 @findex set-offset (c-) | |
| 5076 @kindex C-c C-o | |
| 5077 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current | |
| 5078 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there | |
| 5079 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol. | |
| 5080 | |
| 5081 You can use @code{c-set-offsets} interactively within a @ccmode{} | |
| 5082 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings. | |
| 5083 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change | |
| 5084 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset | |
| 5085 (defaulting to the current offset). | |
| 5086 | |
| 5087 @code{c-set-offsets} takes two arguments when used programmatically: | |
| 5088 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset}, | |
| 5089 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command | |
| 5090 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of | |
| 5091 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a | |
| 5092 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{} | |
| 5093 itself uses this function when initializing styles. | |
| 5094 @end deffn | |
| 5095 | |
| 5096 @cindex offset specification | |
| 5097 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of | |
| 5098 the following: | |
| 5099 | |
| 5100 @table @asis | |
| 5101 @item An integer | |
| 5102 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative | |
| 5103 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro | |
| 5104 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will | |
| 5105 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an | |
| 5106 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation | |
| 5107 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to | |
| 5108 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart | |
| 5109 from zero). | |
| 5110 | |
| 5111 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/} | |
| 5112 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of | |
| 5113 @code{c-basic-offset}: | |
| 5114 | |
| 5115 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset}, | |
| 5116 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level | |
| 5117 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the | |
| 5118 values that the special symbols correspond to: | |
| 5119 | |
| 5120 @table @code | |
| 5121 @item + | |
| 5122 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1 | |
| 5123 @item - | |
| 5124 @code{c-basic-offset} times -1 | |
| 5125 @item ++ | |
| 5126 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2 | |
| 5127 @item -- | |
| 5128 @code{c-basic-offset} times -2 | |
| 5129 @item * | |
| 5130 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5 | |
| 5131 @item / | |
| 5132 @code{c-basic-offset} times -0.5 | |
| 5133 @end table | |
| 5134 | |
| 5135 @item A vector | |
| 5136 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute | |
| 5137 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated | |
| 5138 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from | |
| 5139 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being | |
| 5140 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector | |
| 5141 beyond the first will be ignored. | |
| 5142 | |
| 5143 @item A function or lambda expression | |
| 5144 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be | |
| 5145 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more | |
| 5146 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired | |
| 5147 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for | |
| 5148 details about them. | |
| 5149 | |
| 5150 @item A symbol with a variable binding | |
| 5151 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes | |
| 5152 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is | |
| 5153 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a | |
| 5154 vector (an absolute offset). | |
| 5155 | |
| 5156 @item A list | |
| 5157 The offset can also be a list containing several offset | |
| 5158 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list | |
| 5159 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up | |
| 5160 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in | |
| 5161 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the | |
| 5162 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value. | |
| 5163 | |
| 5164 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined. | |
| 5165 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the | |
| 5166 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements: | |
| 5167 | |
| 5168 @table @code | |
| 5169 @item first | |
| 5170 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent | |
| 5171 elements of the list don't get evaluated. | |
| 5172 @item min | |
| 5173 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or | |
| 5174 absolute - they can't be mixed. | |
| 5175 @item max | |
| 5176 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or | |
| 5177 absolute - they can't be mixed. | |
| 5178 @item add | |
| 5179 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be | |
| 5180 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets | |
| 5181 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case. | |
| 5182 @end table | |
| 5183 | |
| 5184 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above | |
| 5185 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list | |
| 5186 will be combined according to the method @code{first}. | |
| 5187 @end table | |
| 5188 | |
| 5189 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p | |
| 5190 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-) | |
| 5191 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative | |
| 5192 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable | |
| 5193 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an | |
| 5194 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since | |
| 5195 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return | |
| 5196 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave | |
| 5197 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}. | |
| 5198 | |
| 5199 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5200 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation | |
| 5201 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5202 @section Interactive Customization | |
| 5203 @cindex customization, interactive | |
| 5204 @cindex interactive customization | |
| 5205 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5206 | |
| 5207 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the | |
| 5208 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the | |
| 5209 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise | |
| 5210 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}: | |
| 5211 | |
| 5212 @example | |
| 5213 @group | |
| 5214 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 5215 2: @{ | |
| 5216 3: if( doit ) | |
| 5217 4: @{ | |
| 5218 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 5219 6: @} | |
| 5220 7: return( val ); | |
| 5221 8: @} | |
| 5222 @end group | |
| 5223 @end example | |
| 5224 | |
| 5225 @noindent | |
| 5226 to: | |
| 5227 | |
| 5228 @example | |
| 5229 @group | |
| 5230 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 5231 2: @{ | |
| 5232 3: if( doit ) | |
| 5233 4: @{ | |
| 5234 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 5235 6: @} | |
| 5236 7: return( val ); | |
| 5237 8: @} | |
| 5238 @end group | |
| 5239 @end example | |
| 5240 | |
| 5241 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a | |
| 5242 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the | |
| 5243 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we | |
| 5244 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line, | |
| 5245 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations | |
| 5246 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields: | |
| 5247 | |
| 5248 @example | |
| 5249 ((substatement-open 44)) | |
| 5250 @end example | |
| 5251 | |
| 5252 @noindent | |
| 5253 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to | |
| 5254 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic | |
| 5255 symbol. | |
| 5256 | |
| 5257 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts | |
| 5258 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default. | |
| 5259 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the | |
| 5260 syntactic symbol we want to change! | |
| 5261 | |
| 5262 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new | |
| 5263 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this | |
| 5264 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter | |
| 5265 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the | |
| 5266 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}. | |
| 5267 | |
| 5268 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q} | |
| 5269 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example | |
| 5270 should now look like: | |
| 5271 | |
| 5272 @example | |
| 5273 @group | |
| 5274 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 5275 2: @{ | |
| 5276 3: if( doit ) | |
| 5277 4: @{ | |
| 5278 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 5279 6: @} | |
| 5280 7: return( val ); | |
| 5281 8: @} | |
| 5282 @end group | |
| 5283 @end example | |
| 5284 | |
| 5285 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we | |
| 5286 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to | |
| 5287 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more | |
| 5288 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach | |
| 5289 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the | |
| 5290 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further | |
| 5291 adjustments. | |
| 5292 | |
| 5293 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7) | |
| 5294 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset | |
| 5295 @findex set-offset (c-) | |
| 5296 @kindex C-c C-o | |
| 5297 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient | |
| 5298 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see | |
| 5299 the example above) and from your mode hook. | |
| 5300 | |
| 5301 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the | |
| 5302 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset | |
| 5303 for that syntactic element. | |
| 5304 @end deffn | |
| 5305 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT. | |
| 5306 | |
| 5307 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5308 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation | |
| 5309 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5310 @section Line-Up Functions | |
| 5311 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5312 | |
| 5313 @cindex line-up function | |
| 5314 @cindex indentation function | |
| 5315 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic | |
| 5316 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you | |
| 5317 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening | |
| 5318 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{} | |
| 5319 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}. | |
| 5320 | |
| 5321 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is | |
| 5322 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many | |
| 5323 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these | |
| 5324 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}. | |
| 5325 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a | |
| 5326 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}). | |
| 5327 | |
| 5328 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested | |
| 5329 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be | |
| 5330 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode. | |
| 5331 | |
| 5332 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in | |
| 5333 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an | |
| 5334 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil}, | |
| 5335 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case - try a | |
| 5336 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}. | |
| 5337 | |
| 5338 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions, | |
| 5339 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For | |
| 5340 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates | |
| 5341 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with. | |
| 5342 | |
| 5343 @macro workswith | |
| 5344 @emph{Works with:@ } | |
| 5345 @end macro | |
| 5346 @ifinfo | |
| 5347 @unmacro workswith | |
| 5348 @macro workswith | |
| 5349 Works with: | |
| 5350 @end macro | |
| 5351 @end ifinfo | |
| 5352 | |
| 5353 @macro sssTBasicOffset | |
| 5354 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c | |
| 5355 @end macro | |
| 5356 | |
| 5357 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset | |
| 5358 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c | |
| 5359 @end macro | |
| 5360 | |
| 5361 @macro hereFn{func} | |
| 5362 <- @i{\func\}@c | |
| 5363 @end macro | |
| 5364 | |
| 5365 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P | |
| 5366 @iftex | |
| 5367 @unmacro hereFn | |
| 5368 @macro hereFn{func} | |
| 5369 <-@i{\func\}@c | |
| 5370 @end macro | |
| 5371 @end iftex | |
| 5372 | |
| 5373 @menu | |
| 5374 * Brace/Paren Line-Up:: | |
| 5375 * List Line-Up:: | |
| 5376 * Operator Line-Up:: | |
| 5377 * Comment Line-Up:: | |
| 5378 * Misc Line-Up:: | |
| 5379 @end menu | |
| 5380 | |
| 5381 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5382 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions | |
| 5383 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5384 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions | |
| 5385 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5386 | |
| 5387 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces, | |
| 5388 parentheses and statements within brace blocks. | |
| 5389 | |
| 5390 @defun c-lineup-close-paren | |
| 5391 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-) | |
| 5392 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the | |
| 5393 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no | |
| 5394 indentation is added. E.g: | |
| 5395 | |
| 5396 @example | |
| 5397 @group | |
| 5398 main (int, | |
| 5399 char ** | |
| 5400 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren} | |
| 5401 @end group | |
| 5402 @end example | |
| 5403 | |
| 5404 @noindent | |
| 5405 and | |
| 5406 | |
| 5407 @example | |
| 5408 @group | |
| 5409 main ( | |
| 5410 int, char ** | |
| 5411 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren} | |
| 5412 @end group | |
| 5413 @end example | |
| 5414 | |
| 5415 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the | |
| 5416 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is | |
| 5417 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See | |
| 5418 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure. | |
| 5419 | |
| 5420 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols. | |
| 5421 @end defun | |
| 5422 | |
| 5423 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5424 | |
| 5425 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren} | |
| 5426 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren | |
| 5427 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-) | |
| 5428 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function | |
| 5429 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the | |
| 5430 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with | |
| 5431 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all | |
| 5432 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren. | |
| 5433 | |
| 5434 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the | |
| 5435 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is | |
| 5436 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further | |
| 5437 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure. | |
| 5438 | |
| 5439 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on | |
| 5440 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and | |
| 5441 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5442 @end defun | |
| 5443 | |
| 5444 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5445 | |
| 5446 @defun c-indent-one-line-block | |
| 5447 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-) | |
| 5448 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g: | |
| 5449 | |
| 5450 @example | |
| 5451 @group | |
| 5452 if (n > 0) | |
| 5453 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block} | |
| 5454 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5455 @end group | |
| 5456 @end example | |
| 5457 | |
| 5458 @noindent | |
| 5459 and | |
| 5460 | |
| 5461 @example | |
| 5462 @group | |
| 5463 if (n > 0) | |
| 5464 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block} | |
| 5465 m+=n; n=0; | |
| 5466 @} | |
| 5467 @end group | |
| 5468 @end example | |
| 5469 | |
| 5470 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters. | |
| 5471 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block, | |
| 5472 which makes the function usable in list expressions. | |
| 5473 | |
| 5474 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the | |
| 5475 @code{-open} symbols. | |
| 5476 @end defun | |
| 5477 | |
| 5478 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5479 | |
| 5480 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block | |
| 5481 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-) | |
| 5482 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g: | |
| 5483 | |
| 5484 @example | |
| 5485 @group | |
| 5486 int *foo[] = @{ | |
| 5487 NULL, | |
| 5488 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block} | |
| 5489 @end group | |
| 5490 @end example | |
| 5491 | |
| 5492 @noindent | |
| 5493 and | |
| 5494 | |
| 5495 @example | |
| 5496 @group | |
| 5497 int *foo[] = @{ | |
| 5498 NULL, | |
| 5499 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block} | |
| 5500 17 | |
| 5501 @}, | |
| 5502 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5503 @end group | |
| 5504 @end example | |
| 5505 | |
| 5506 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters. | |
| 5507 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline | |
| 5508 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions. | |
| 5509 | |
| 5510 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the | |
| 5511 @code{-open} symbols. | |
| 5512 @end defun | |
| 5513 | |
| 5514 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5515 | |
| 5516 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements | |
| 5517 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-) | |
| 5518 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement | |
| 5519 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in | |
| 5520 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own | |
| 5521 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g: | |
| 5522 | |
| 5523 @example | |
| 5524 @group | |
| 5525 int main() | |
| 5526 @{ puts ("Hello!"); | |
| 5527 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements} | |
| 5528 @} | |
| 5529 @end group | |
| 5530 @end example | |
| 5531 | |
| 5532 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with, | |
| 5533 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list | |
| 5534 expressions. | |
| 5535 | |
| 5536 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol. | |
| 5537 @end defun | |
| 5538 | |
| 5539 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5540 | |
| 5541 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block | |
| 5542 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-) | |
| 5543 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the | |
| 5544 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g. for Java | |
| 5545 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword, | |
| 5546 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda} | |
| 5547 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a | |
| 5548 construct. | |
| 5549 | |
| 5550 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement}, | |
| 5551 @code{inexpr-class}. | |
| 5552 @end defun | |
| 5553 | |
| 5554 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5555 | |
| 5556 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks | |
| 5557 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-) | |
| 5558 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way | |
| 5559 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks, | |
| 5560 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith | |
| 5561 style indentation. Consider the following examples: | |
| 5562 | |
| 5563 @example | |
| 5564 @group | |
| 5565 int foo() | |
| 5566 @{ | |
| 5567 a; | |
| 5568 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks} | |
| 5569 @end group | |
| 5570 @end example | |
| 5571 | |
| 5572 @example | |
| 5573 @group | |
| 5574 int foo() | |
| 5575 @{ | |
| 5576 @{ | |
| 5577 a; | |
| 5578 @} | |
| 5579 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks} | |
| 5580 @end group | |
| 5581 @end example | |
| 5582 | |
| 5583 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style | |
| 5584 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect | |
| 5585 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the | |
| 5586 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x} | |
| 5587 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for | |
| 5588 @code{statement} was set simply to zero. | |
| 5589 | |
| 5590 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the | |
| 5591 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead | |
| 5592 indents relative to the surrounding block just like | |
| 5593 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}. | |
| 5594 | |
| 5595 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open}, | |
| 5596 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}. | |
| 5597 @end defun | |
| 5598 | |
| 5599 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5600 | |
| 5601 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block | |
| 5602 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-) | |
| 5603 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way | |
| 5604 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g: | |
| 5605 | |
| 5606 @example | |
| 5607 @group | |
| 5608 something | |
| 5609 @{ | |
| 5610 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block} | |
| 5611 @} | |
| 5612 @end group | |
| 5613 @end example | |
| 5614 | |
| 5615 @noindent | |
| 5616 and | |
| 5617 | |
| 5618 @example | |
| 5619 @group | |
| 5620 something @{ | |
| 5621 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block} | |
| 5622 @} | |
| 5623 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5624 @end group | |
| 5625 @end example | |
| 5626 | |
| 5627 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second | |
| 5628 @code{c-basic-offset} is added. | |
| 5629 | |
| 5630 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro}, | |
| 5631 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, | |
| 5632 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro}, | |
| 5633 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, | |
| 5634 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g. @code{inclass} | |
| 5635 and @code{inextern-lang}. | |
| 5636 @end defun | |
| 5637 | |
| 5638 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5639 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions | |
| 5640 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5641 @subsection List Line-Up Functions | |
| 5642 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5643 | |
| 5644 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which | |
| 5645 form lists of items, usually separated by commas. | |
| 5646 | |
| 5647 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly | |
| 5648 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines | |
| 5649 contained within parentheses. | |
| 5650 | |
| 5651 @defun c-lineup-arglist | |
| 5652 @findex lineup-arglist (c-) | |
| 5653 Line up the current argument line under the first argument. | |
| 5654 | |
| 5655 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open | |
| 5656 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is | |
| 5657 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in | |
| 5658 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g: | |
| 5659 | |
| 5660 @example | |
| 5661 @group | |
| 5662 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{ | |
| 5663 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]); | |
| 5664 @}); | |
| 5665 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5666 @end group | |
| 5667 @end example | |
| 5668 | |
| 5669 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code | |
| 5670 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of | |
| 5671 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to | |
| 5672 indent such cases this way. | |
| 5673 | |
| 5674 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}. | |
| 5675 @end defun | |
| 5676 | |
| 5677 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5678 | |
| 5679 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren | |
| 5680 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-) | |
| 5681 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or | |
| 5682 brace block. | |
| 5683 | |
| 5684 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro}, | |
| 5685 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro}, | |
| 5686 @code{arglist-intro}. | |
| 5687 @end defun | |
| 5688 | |
| 5689 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5690 | |
| 5691 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher | |
| 5692 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-) | |
| 5693 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member | |
| 5694 initializers under each other. E.g: | |
| 5695 | |
| 5696 @example | |
| 5697 @group | |
| 5698 Foo::Foo (int a, int b): | |
| 5699 Cyphr (a), | |
| 5700 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher} | |
| 5701 @end group | |
| 5702 @end example | |
| 5703 | |
| 5704 @noindent | |
| 5705 and | |
| 5706 | |
| 5707 @example | |
| 5708 @group | |
| 5709 class Foo | |
| 5710 : public Cyphr, | |
| 5711 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher} | |
| 5712 @end group | |
| 5713 @end example | |
| 5714 | |
| 5715 @noindent | |
| 5716 and | |
| 5717 | |
| 5718 @example | |
| 5719 @group | |
| 5720 Foo::Foo (int a, int b) | |
| 5721 : Cyphr (a) | |
| 5722 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher} | |
| 5723 @end group | |
| 5724 @end example | |
| 5725 | |
| 5726 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}. | |
| 5727 @end defun | |
| 5728 | |
| 5729 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5730 | |
| 5731 @defun c-lineup-java-inher | |
| 5732 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-) | |
| 5733 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names | |
| 5734 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends} | |
| 5735 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are | |
| 5736 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword. | |
| 5737 E.g: | |
| 5738 | |
| 5739 @example | |
| 5740 @group | |
| 5741 class Foo | |
| 5742 extends | |
| 5743 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher} | |
| 5744 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5745 @end group | |
| 5746 @end example | |
| 5747 | |
| 5748 @noindent | |
| 5749 and | |
| 5750 | |
| 5751 @example | |
| 5752 @group | |
| 5753 class Foo | |
| 5754 extends Cyphr, | |
| 5755 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher} | |
| 5756 @end group | |
| 5757 @end example | |
| 5758 | |
| 5759 @workswith @code{inher-cont}. | |
| 5760 @end defun | |
| 5761 | |
| 5762 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5763 | |
| 5764 @defun c-lineup-java-throws | |
| 5765 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-) | |
| 5766 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the | |
| 5767 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other. | |
| 5768 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the | |
| 5769 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself | |
| 5770 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration | |
| 5771 start if it doesn't hang. E.g: | |
| 5772 | |
| 5773 @example | |
| 5774 @group | |
| 5775 int foo() | |
| 5776 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws} | |
| 5777 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws} | |
| 5778 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5779 @end group | |
| 5780 @end example | |
| 5781 | |
| 5782 @noindent | |
| 5783 and | |
| 5784 | |
| 5785 @example | |
| 5786 @group | |
| 5787 int foo() throws Cyphr, | |
| 5788 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws} | |
| 5789 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws} | |
| 5790 @end group | |
| 5791 @end example | |
| 5792 | |
| 5793 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}. | |
| 5794 @end defun | |
| 5795 | |
| 5796 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5797 | |
| 5798 @defun c-lineup-template-args | |
| 5799 @findex lineup-template-args (c-) | |
| 5800 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but | |
| 5801 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the | |
| 5802 opening @samp{<}. | |
| 5803 | |
| 5804 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is | |
| 5805 returned if there's no template argument on the first line. | |
| 5806 | |
| 5807 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}. | |
| 5808 @end defun | |
| 5809 | |
| 5810 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5811 | |
| 5812 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call | |
| 5813 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-) | |
| 5814 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does | |
| 5815 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver, | |
| 5816 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line | |
| 5817 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are | |
| 5818 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so | |
| 5819 lineup the current line with it. | |
| 5820 | |
| 5821 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}. | |
| 5822 @end defun | |
| 5823 | |
| 5824 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5825 | |
| 5826 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args | |
| 5827 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-) | |
| 5828 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon | |
| 5829 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line. | |
| 5830 | |
| 5831 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}. | |
| 5832 @end defun | |
| 5833 | |
| 5834 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5835 | |
| 5836 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 | |
| 5837 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-) | |
| 5838 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on | |
| 5839 the current line with the colon on the previous line. | |
| 5840 | |
| 5841 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}. | |
| 5842 @end defun | |
| 5843 | |
| 5844 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5845 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions | |
| 5846 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5847 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions | |
| 5848 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5849 | |
| 5850 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which | |
| 5851 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous | |
| 5852 line. | |
| 5853 | |
| 5854 @defun c-lineup-argcont | |
| 5855 @findex lineup-argcont (c-) | |
| 5856 Line up a continued argument. E.g: | |
| 5857 | |
| 5858 @example | |
| 5859 @group | |
| 5860 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc | |
| 5861 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont} | |
| 5862 @end group | |
| 5863 @end example | |
| 5864 | |
| 5865 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on | |
| 5866 lines which are the start of an argument. | |
| 5867 | |
| 5868 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognised as an argument | |
| 5869 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the | |
| 5870 expressions for the operands. | |
| 5871 | |
| 5872 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5873 @end defun | |
| 5874 | |
| 5875 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5876 | |
| 5877 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators | |
| 5878 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-) | |
| 5879 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren. | |
| 5880 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave | |
| 5881 those cases to other line-up functions. Example: | |
| 5882 | |
| 5883 @example | |
| 5884 @group | |
| 5885 if ( x < 10 | |
| 5886 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators} | |
| 5887 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}} | |
| 5888 ) | |
| 5889 @end group | |
| 5890 @end example | |
| 5891 | |
| 5892 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix | |
| 5893 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup | |
| 5894 settings, e.g. as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a | |
| 5895 suggestion to get a consistent style): | |
| 5896 | |
| 5897 @example | |
| 5898 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont | |
| 5899 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0)) | |
| 5900 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty | |
| 5901 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist)) | |
| 5902 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close | |
| 5903 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren)) | |
| 5904 @end example | |
| 5905 | |
| 5906 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5907 @end defun | |
| 5908 | |
| 5909 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5910 | |
| 5911 @defun c-lineup-assignments | |
| 5912 @findex lineup-assignments (c-) | |
| 5913 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line | |
| 5914 in the statement. If there isn't any, return nil to allow stacking with | |
| 5915 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment | |
| 5916 operator too, try to align it with the first one. | |
| 5917 | |
| 5918 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 5919 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5920 | |
| 5921 @end defun | |
| 5922 | |
| 5923 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5924 | |
| 5925 @defun c-lineup-math | |
| 5926 @findex lineup-math (c-) | |
| 5927 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset} | |
| 5928 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e. this | |
| 5929 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments | |
| 5930 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations. | |
| 5931 | |
| 5932 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 5933 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5934 @end defun | |
| 5935 | |
| 5936 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5937 | |
| 5938 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls | |
| 5939 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-) | |
| 5940 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with | |
| 5941 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more | |
| 5942 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up | |
| 5943 with the first of those tokens. E.g: | |
| 5944 | |
| 5945 @example | |
| 5946 @group | |
| 5947 r = proc->add(17)->add(18) | |
| 5948 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls} | |
| 5949 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}} | |
| 5950 @end group | |
| 5951 @end example | |
| 5952 | |
| 5953 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list | |
| 5954 expressions. | |
| 5955 | |
| 5956 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 5957 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5958 @end defun | |
| 5959 | |
| 5960 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5961 | |
| 5962 @defun c-lineup-streamop | |
| 5963 @findex lineup-streamop (c-) | |
| 5964 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e. @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}). | |
| 5965 | |
| 5966 @workswith @code{stream-op}. | |
| 5967 @end defun | |
| 5968 | |
| 5969 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5970 | |
| 5971 @defun c-lineup-string-cont | |
| 5972 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-) | |
| 5973 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued | |
| 5974 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after | |
| 5975 another one. E.g: | |
| 5976 | |
| 5977 @example | |
| 5978 @group | |
| 5979 result = prefix + "A message " | |
| 5980 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont} | |
| 5981 @end group | |
| 5982 @end example | |
| 5983 | |
| 5984 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other | |
| 5985 lineup functions. | |
| 5986 | |
| 5987 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 5988 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5989 @end defun | |
| 5990 | |
| 5991 | |
| 5992 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5993 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions | |
| 5994 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5995 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions | |
| 5996 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5997 | |
| 5998 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types | |
| 5999 of comment structure. | |
| 6000 | |
| 6001 @defun c-lineup-C-comments | |
| 6002 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-) | |
| 6003 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used | |
| 6004 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples: | |
| 6005 | |
| 6006 @example | |
| 6007 @group | |
| 6008 /* /** /* | |
| 6009 * text * text text | |
| 6010 */ */ */ | |
| 6011 @end group | |
| 6012 @end example | |
| 6013 | |
| 6014 @example | |
| 6015 @group | |
| 6016 /* text /* /** | |
| 6017 text ** text ** text | |
| 6018 */ */ */ | |
| 6019 @end group | |
| 6020 @end example | |
| 6021 | |
| 6022 @example | |
| 6023 @group | |
| 6024 /************************************************** | |
| 6025 * text | |
| 6026 *************************************************/ | |
| 6027 @end group | |
| 6028 @end example | |
| 6029 | |
| 6030 @vindex comment-start-skip | |
| 6031 @example | |
| 6032 @group | |
| 6033 /************************************************** | |
| 6034 Free form text comments: | |
| 6035 In comments with a long delimiter line at the | |
| 6036 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines | |
| 6037 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The | |
| 6038 delimiter line is whatever matches the | |
| 6039 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp. | |
| 6040 **************************************************/ | |
| 6041 @end group | |
| 6042 @end example | |
| 6043 | |
| 6044 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize | |
| 6045 the comment line prefix, e.g. the @samp{*} that usually starts every | |
| 6046 line inside a comment. | |
| 6047 | |
| 6048 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol. | |
| 6049 @end defun | |
| 6050 | |
| 6051 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6052 | |
| 6053 @defun c-lineup-comment | |
| 6054 @findex lineup-comment (c-) | |
| 6055 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable | |
| 6056 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a | |
| 6057 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved. | |
| 6058 | |
| 6059 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset | |
| 6060 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-) | |
| 6061 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can | |
| 6062 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form | |
| 6063 | |
| 6064 @example | |
| 6065 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}}) | |
| 6066 @end example | |
| 6067 | |
| 6068 @noindent | |
| 6069 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to | |
| 6070 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount | |
| 6071 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value | |
| 6072 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}. | |
| 6073 @end defopt | |
| 6074 | |
| 6075 @workswith @code{comment-intro}. | |
| 6076 @end defun | |
| 6077 | |
| 6078 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6079 | |
| 6080 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment | |
| 6081 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-) | |
| 6082 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is | |
| 6083 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the | |
| 6084 block. E.g: | |
| 6085 | |
| 6086 @example | |
| 6087 @group | |
| 6088 int main() | |
| 6089 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment} | |
| 6090 @{ | |
| 6091 return 0; | |
| 6092 @} | |
| 6093 @end group | |
| 6094 @end example | |
| 6095 | |
| 6096 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list | |
| 6097 expressions. | |
| 6098 | |
| 6099 @workswith @code{comment-intro}. | |
| 6100 @end defun | |
| 6101 | |
| 6102 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6103 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions | |
| 6104 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6105 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions | |
| 6106 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6107 | |
| 6108 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into | |
| 6109 any earlier category. | |
| 6110 | |
| 6111 @defun c-lineup-dont-change | |
| 6112 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-) | |
| 6113 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it | |
| 6114 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups. | |
| 6115 | |
| 6116 @workswith Any syntactic symbol. | |
| 6117 @end defun | |
| 6118 | |
| 6119 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6120 | |
| 6121 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define | |
| 6122 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-) | |
| 6123 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the | |
| 6124 construct preceding the macro. E.g: | |
| 6125 | |
| 6126 @example | |
| 6127 @group | |
| 6128 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}} | |
| 6129 \"Some text.\"; | |
| 6130 | |
| 6131 #define X(A, B) \ | |
| 6132 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6133 printf (A, B); \ | |
| 6134 @} while (0) | |
| 6135 @end group | |
| 6136 @end example | |
| 6137 | |
| 6138 @noindent | |
| 6139 and: | |
| 6140 | |
| 6141 @example | |
| 6142 @group | |
| 6143 int dribble() @{ | |
| 6144 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}} | |
| 6145 error(\"Not running!\"); | |
| 6146 | |
| 6147 #define X(A, B) \ | |
| 6148 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6149 printf (A, B); \ | |
| 6150 @} while (0) | |
| 6151 @end group | |
| 6152 @end example | |
| 6153 | |
| 6154 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the | |
| 6155 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to | |
| 6156 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g. in the following cases, | |
| 6157 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the | |
| 6158 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs | |
| 6159 on the @samp{#define} line: | |
| 6160 | |
| 6161 @example | |
| 6162 @group | |
| 6163 const char msg[] = | |
| 6164 \"Some text.\"; | |
| 6165 | |
| 6166 #define X(A, B) do @{ \ | |
| 6167 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6168 this->refs++; \ | |
| 6169 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6170 @end group | |
| 6171 @end example | |
| 6172 | |
| 6173 @noindent | |
| 6174 and: | |
| 6175 | |
| 6176 @example | |
| 6177 @group | |
| 6178 int dribble() @{ | |
| 6179 if (!running) | |
| 6180 error(\"Not running!\"); | |
| 6181 | |
| 6182 #define X(A, B) do @{ \ | |
| 6183 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6184 this->refs++; \ | |
| 6185 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6186 @end group | |
| 6187 @end example | |
| 6188 | |
| 6189 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero | |
| 6190 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They | |
| 6191 are then added to the two column indentation that | |
| 6192 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here. | |
| 6193 | |
| 6194 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned | |
| 6195 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default | |
| 6196 indentation on the top level. | |
| 6197 | |
| 6198 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this | |
| 6199 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring | |
| 6200 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest | |
| 6201 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the | |
| 6202 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as | |
| 6203 described above. | |
| 6204 | |
| 6205 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}. | |
| 6206 @end defun | |
| 6207 | |
| 6208 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6209 | |
| 6210 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg | |
| 6211 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-) | |
| 6212 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line. | |
| 6213 | |
| 6214 @example | |
| 6215 @group | |
| 6216 asm ("foo %1, %0\n" | |
| 6217 "bar %0, %1" | |
| 6218 : "=r" (w), | |
| 6219 "=r" (x) | |
| 6220 : "0" (y), | |
| 6221 "1" (z)); | |
| 6222 @end group | |
| 6223 @end example | |
| 6224 | |
| 6225 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the | |
| 6226 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}. | |
| 6227 | |
| 6228 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to | |
| 6229 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual | |
| 6230 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of | |
| 6231 arglist lineups, e.g. | |
| 6232 | |
| 6233 @example | |
| 6234 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist) | |
| 6235 @end example | |
| 6236 | |
| 6237 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 6238 @end defun | |
| 6239 | |
| 6240 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6241 | |
| 6242 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont | |
| 6243 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-) | |
| 6244 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation | |
| 6245 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of | |
| 6246 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so | |
| 6247 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or | |
| 6248 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but | |
| 6249 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a | |
| 6250 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is | |
| 6251 added to the indentation. E.g: | |
| 6252 | |
| 6253 @example | |
| 6254 @group | |
| 6255 int | |
| 6256 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6257 @{ | |
| 6258 return -i; | |
| 6259 @} | |
| 6260 @end group | |
| 6261 @end example | |
| 6262 | |
| 6263 @noindent | |
| 6264 and | |
| 6265 | |
| 6266 @example | |
| 6267 @group | |
| 6268 struct | |
| 6269 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6270 @{ | |
| 6271 double height; | |
| 6272 @} | |
| 6273 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6274 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6275 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 6276 @end group | |
| 6277 @end example | |
| 6278 | |
| 6279 @noindent | |
| 6280 and | |
| 6281 | |
| 6282 @example | |
| 6283 @group | |
| 6284 struct larch | |
| 6285 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6286 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6287 @end group | |
| 6288 @end example | |
| 6289 | |
| 6290 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}. | |
| 6291 @end defun | |
| 6292 | |
| 6293 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6294 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation | |
| 6295 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6296 @section Custom Line-Up Functions | |
| 6297 @cindex customization, indentation functions | |
| 6298 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6299 | |
| 6300 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom | |
| 6301 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic | |
| 6302 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want, | |
| 6303 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function | |
| 6304 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}). | |
| 6305 | |
| 6306 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions, | |
| 6307 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good | |
| 6308 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up | |
| 6309 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up | |
| 6310 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these | |
| 6311 predefined functions, which can be found in the file | |
| 6312 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you | |
| 6313 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it; | |
| 6314 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. | |
| 6315 | |
| 6316 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic | |
| 6317 element (see below). The return value is a @code{c-offsets-alist} | |
| 6318 offset specification: for example, an integer, a symbol such as | |
| 6319 @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning @code{nil} is useful | |
| 6320 when the offset specification for a syntactic element is a list | |
| 6321 containing the line-up function (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even | |
| 6322 another line-up function. Full details of these are in | |
| 6323 @ref{c-offsets-alist}. | |
| 6324 | |
| 6325 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the | |
| 6326 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do | |
| 6327 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e. setting text properties for caching | |
| 6328 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run. | |
| 6329 | |
| 6330 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is | |
| 6331 a cons cell of the form | |
| 6332 | |
| 6333 @example | |
| 6334 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}}) | |
| 6335 @end example | |
| 6336 | |
| 6337 @noindent | |
| 6338 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the | |
| 6339 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2. | |
| 6340 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was | |
| 6341 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any) | |
| 6342 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol | |
| 6343 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic | |
| 6344 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and | |
| 6345 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to | |
| 6346 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we | |
| 6347 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare | |
| 6348 your setup for this by using the access functions | |
| 6349 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.) described below. | |
| 6350 | |
| 6351 @vindex c-syntactic-element | |
| 6352 @vindex syntactic-element (c-) | |
| 6353 @vindex c-syntactic-context | |
| 6354 @vindex syntactic-context (c-) | |
| 6355 Some syntactic symbols, e.g. @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more | |
| 6356 info in the syntactic element - typically other positions that can be | |
| 6357 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed | |
| 6358 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can | |
| 6359 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element}, | |
| 6360 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The | |
| 6361 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful - it gets | |
| 6362 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom | |
| 6363 Braces}. | |
| 6364 | |
| 6365 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic | |
| 6366 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to | |
| 6367 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form | |
| 6368 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in | |
| 6369 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are: | |
| 6370 | |
| 6371 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem | |
| 6372 @findex langelem-sym (c-) | |
| 6373 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}. | |
| 6374 @end defun | |
| 6375 | |
| 6376 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem | |
| 6377 @findex langelem-pos (c-) | |
| 6378 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or nil if there is none. | |
| 6379 @end defun | |
| 6380 | |
| 6381 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point | |
| 6382 @findex langelem-col (c-) | |
| 6383 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move | |
| 6384 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is | |
| 6385 non-@code{nil}. | |
| 6386 @end defun | |
| 6387 | |
| 6388 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem | |
| 6389 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-) | |
| 6390 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there | |
| 6391 is none. | |
| 6392 | |
| 6393 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if | |
| 6394 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is | |
| 6395 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from | |
| 6396 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}. | |
| 6397 @end defun | |
| 6398 | |
| 6399 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and | |
| 6400 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a | |
| 6401 custom line-up function associated with it. | |
| 6402 | |
| 6403 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6404 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation | |
| 6405 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6406 @section Other Special Indentations | |
| 6407 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6408 | |
| 6409 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation: | |
| 6410 | |
| 6411 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation | |
| 6412 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-) | |
| 6413 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is | |
| 6414 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is | |
| 6415 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1. | |
| 6416 | |
| 6417 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum | |
| 6418 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-) | |
| 6419 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum | |
| 6420 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to | |
| 6421 work. | |
| 6422 @end defopt | |
| 6423 | |
| 6424 @defopt c-special-indent-hook | |
| 6425 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-) | |
| 6426 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after | |
| 6427 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if | |
| 6428 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by | |
| 6429 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function | |
| 6430 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments | |
| 6431 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors | |
| 6432 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it | |
| 6433 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom | |
| 6434 Line-Up}). | |
| 6435 | |
| 6436 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable | |
| 6437 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context | |
| 6438 (i.e. what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line. | |
| 6439 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark | |
| 6440 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e. you'll probably | |
| 6441 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The | |
| 6442 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the | |
| 6443 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point | |
| 6444 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}. | |
| 6445 | |
| 6446 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled | |
| 6447 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add | |
| 6448 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}. | |
| 6449 @end defopt | |
| 6450 | |
| 6451 | |
| 6452 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6453 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top | |
| 6454 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6455 @chapter Customizing Macros | |
| 6456 @cindex macros | |
| 6457 @cindex preprocessor directives | |
| 6458 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6459 | |
| 6460 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to | |
|
86093
d223d695f3f3
(Electric Keys, Electric Keys, Custom Macros): Fix typos.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
85173
diff
changeset
|
6461 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behavior |
| 84286 | 6462 by setting the following user option: |
| 6463 | |
| 6464 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros | |
| 6465 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-) | |
| 6466 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this | |
| 6467 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as | |
| 6468 @code{cpp-macro-cont}. | |
| 6469 @end defopt | |
| 6470 | |
| 6471 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation | |
| 6472 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is | |
| 6473 customized with these variables: | |
| 6474 | |
| 6475 @defopt c-backslash-column | |
| 6476 @vindex backslash-column (c-) | |
| 6477 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column | |
| 6478 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-) | |
| 6479 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation | |
| 6480 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that | |
| 6481 automatically insert or align such backslashes, | |
| 6482 e.g. @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}. | |
| 6483 | |
| 6484 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the | |
| 6485 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the | |
| 6486 next tab stop (i.e. next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is | |
| 6487 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they | |
| 6488 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past | |
| 6489 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the | |
| 6490 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too | |
| 6491 long ``stick out'' instead. | |
| 6492 | |
| 6493 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable | |
| 6494 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use | |
| 6495 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}. | |
| 6496 @end defopt | |
| 6497 | |
| 6498 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes | |
| 6499 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-) | |
| 6500 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if | |
| 6501 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted | |
| 6502 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g. by | |
| 6503 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other | |
| 6504 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set. | |
| 6505 | |
| 6506 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically | |
| 6507 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes | |
| 6508 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command | |
| 6509 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}). | |
| 6510 @end defopt | |
| 6511 | |
| 6512 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6513 @node Odds and Ends, Sample .emacs File, Custom Macros, Top | |
| 6514 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6515 @chapter Odds and Ends | |
| 6516 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6517 | |
| 6518 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here. | |
| 6519 | |
| 6520 @defopt c-require-final-newline | |
| 6521 @vindex require-final-newline (c-) | |
| 6522 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved. | |
| 6523 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies | |
| 6524 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving | |
| 6525 Buffers,,, @lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a | |
| 6526 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch | |
| 6527 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language. | |
| 6528 | |
| 6529 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the | |
| 6530 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines. | |
| 6531 These are C, C++ and Objective-C. | |
| 6532 @end defopt | |
| 6533 | |
| 6534 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p | |
| 6535 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-) | |
| 6536 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown | |
| 6537 in the echo area when it's indented (unless | |
| 6538 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when | |
| 6539 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you | |
| 6540 want. | |
| 6541 @end defopt | |
| 6542 | |
| 6543 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors | |
| 6544 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-) | |
| 6545 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and | |
| 6546 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there | |
| 6547 is no corresponding @code{if}. | |
| 6548 | |
| 6549 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for | |
| 6550 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can | |
| 6551 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct | |
| 6552 anchoring position to indent the line in that case. | |
| 6553 @end defopt | |
| 6554 | |
| 6555 | |
| 6556 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6557 @node Sample .emacs File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top | |
| 6558 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6559 @appendix Sample .emacs File | |
| 6560 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6561 | |
| 6562 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way. | |
| 6563 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want | |
| 6564 to change some of the actual values. | |
| 6565 | |
| 6566 @verbatim | |
| 6567 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in | |
| 6568 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on, | |
| 6569 ;; inherit from it. | |
| 6570 (defun my-c-initialization-hook () | |
| 6571 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)) | |
| 6572 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook) | |
| 6573 | |
| 6574 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style | |
| 6575 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol | |
| 6576 ;; made by a style. | |
| 6577 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++))) | |
| 6578 | |
| 6579 ;; Create my personal style. | |
| 6580 (defconst my-c-style | |
| 6581 '((c-tab-always-indent . t) | |
| 6582 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4) | |
| 6583 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after) | |
| 6584 (brace-list-open))) | |
| 6585 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before) | |
| 6586 (inher-intro) | |
| 6587 (case-label after) | |
| 6588 (label after) | |
| 6589 (access-label after))) | |
| 6590 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator | |
| 6591 empty-defun-braces | |
| 6592 defun-close-semi)) | |
| 6593 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist) | |
| 6594 (substatement-open . 0) | |
| 6595 (case-label . 4) | |
| 6596 (block-open . 0) | |
| 6597 (knr-argdecl-intro . -))) | |
| 6598 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t)) | |
| 6599 "My C Programming Style") | |
| 6600 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style) | |
| 6601 | |
| 6602 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode. | |
| 6603 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook () | |
| 6604 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer | |
| 6605 (c-set-style "PERSONAL") | |
| 6606 ;; other customizations | |
| 6607 (setq tab-width 8 | |
| 6608 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs | |
| 6609 indent-tabs-mode nil) | |
| 6610 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete | |
| 6611 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1)) | |
| 6612 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook) | |
| 6613 @end verbatim | |
| 6614 | |
| 6615 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6616 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample .emacs File, Top | |
| 6617 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6618 @chapter Performance Issues | |
| 6619 @cindex performance | |
| 6620 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6621 | |
| 6622 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here. | |
| 6623 | |
| 6624 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often, | |
| 6625 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large | |
| 6626 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such | |
| 6627 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This | |
| 6628 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts | |
| 6629 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance. | |
| 6630 | |
| 6631 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e. take | |
| 6632 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation. | |
| 6633 I.e. it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations, | |
| 6634 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like | |
| 6635 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets | |
| 6636 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in | |
| 6637 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances | |
| 6638 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting | |
| 6639 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section. | |
| 6640 | |
| 6641 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current | |
| 6642 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in | |
| 6643 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest | |
| 6644 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan | |
| 6645 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The | |
| 6646 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it | |
| 6647 gets. | |
| 6648 | |
| 6649 @findex beginning-of-defun | |
| 6650 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the | |
| 6651 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g. a function in C, | |
| 6652 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost | |
| 6653 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as | |
| 6654 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now | |
| 6655 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by | |
| 6656 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal, | |
| 6657 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file. | |
| 6658 | |
| 6659 @findex defun-prompt-regexp | |
| 6660 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp | |
| 6661 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-) | |
| 6662 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common | |
| 6663 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the | |
| 6664 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs | |
| 6665 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant | |
| 6666 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular | |
| 6667 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In | |
| 6668 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This | |
| 6669 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason, | |
| 6670 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set | |
| 6671 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event, | |
| 6672 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow | |
| 6673 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a | |
| 6674 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way! | |
| 6675 | |
| 6676 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks | |
| 6677 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved | |
| 6678 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to | |
| 6679 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long | |
| 6680 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the | |
| 6681 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks'' | |
| 6682 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache | |
| 6683 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the | |
| 6684 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts. | |
| 6685 | |
| 6686 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p | |
| 6687 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-) | |
| 6688 XEmacs users can set the variable | |
| 6689 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This | |
| 6690 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some | |
| 6691 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than | |
| 6692 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for | |
| 6693 styles where these braces are hung (e.g. most JDK-derived Java styles), | |
| 6694 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines | |
| 6695 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to | |
| 6696 Emacs' recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero, | |
| 6697 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable | |
| 6698 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should | |
| 6699 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect | |
| 6700 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs | |
| 6701 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007). | |
| 6702 | |
| 6703 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace, | |
| 6704 i.e. comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a | |
| 6705 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the | |
| 6706 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've | |
| 6707 edited other parts of the file and then moved back). | |
| 6708 | |
| 6709 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on | |
| 6710 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that | |
| 6711 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only | |
| 6712 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e. Lazy Lock or Just-in-time | |
| 6713 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole | |
| 6714 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is | |
| 6715 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen. | |
| 6716 | |
| 6717 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the | |
| 6718 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} | |
| 6719 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible | |
| 6720 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for | |
| 6721 more info. | |
| 6722 | |
| 6723 | |
| 6724 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6725 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top | |
| 6726 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6727 @chapter Limitations and Known Bugs | |
| 6728 @cindex limitations | |
| 6729 @cindex bugs | |
| 6730 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6731 | |
| 6732 @itemize @bullet | |
| 6733 @item | |
| 6734 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences | |
| 6735 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time | |
| 6736 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs, | |
| 6737 and are now utterly obsolete.) | |
| 6738 | |
| 6739 @item | |
| 6740 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines}) | |
| 6741 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive | |
| 6742 editing. | |
| 6743 | |
| 6744 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as | |
| 6745 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With | |
| 6746 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only | |
| 6747 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no | |
| 6748 intention to change this goal. | |
| 6749 | |
| 6750 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some | |
| 6751 other tool instead, e.g. @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent' | |
| 6752 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than | |
| 6753 @ccmode{}. | |
| 6754 | |
| 6755 @item | |
| 6756 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete. | |
| 6757 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents | |
| 6758 it and font-locks it OK. Templates used in expressions, and nested | |
| 6759 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify | |
| 6760 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}. | |
| 6761 | |
| 6762 @item | |
| 6763 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears: | |
| 6764 | |
| 6765 @example | |
| 6766 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3) | |
| 6767 @end example | |
| 6768 | |
| 6769 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some | |
| 6770 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic | |
| 6771 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a | |
| 6772 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly | |
| 6773 early on: | |
| 6774 | |
| 6775 @example | |
| 6776 (defun my-load-cc-fonts () | |
| 6777 (require "cc-fonts")) | |
| 6778 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts) | |
| 6779 @end example | |
| 6780 @end itemize | |
| 6781 | |
| 6782 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6783 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top | |
| 6784 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6785 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions | |
| 6786 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6787 | |
| 6788 @itemize @bullet | |
| 6789 @item | |
| 6790 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?} | |
| 6791 | |
| 6792 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}. | |
| 6793 | |
| 6794 @item | |
| 6795 @kindex RET | |
| 6796 @kindex C-j | |
| 6797 @emph{Why doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?} | |
| 6798 | |
| 6799 Emacs' convention is that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that | |
| 6800 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. You can make @kbd{RET} do this | |
| 6801 too by adding this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}: | |
| 6802 | |
| 6803 @example | |
| 6804 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break) | |
| 6805 @end example | |
| 6806 | |
| 6807 @xref{Getting Started}. This is a very common question. If you want | |
| 6808 this to be the default behavior, don't lobby us, lobby RMS! @t{:-)} | |
| 6809 | |
| 6810 @item | |
| 6811 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?} | |
| 6812 | |
| 6813 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting | |
| 6814 Started}. | |
| 6815 | |
| 6816 @item | |
| 6817 @kindex C-x h | |
| 6818 @kindex C-M-\ | |
| 6819 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?} | |
| 6820 | |
| 6821 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit | |
| 6822 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}. | |
| 6823 | |
| 6824 @item | |
| 6825 @kindex C-M-q | |
| 6826 @kindex C-M-u | |
| 6827 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?} | |
| 6828 | |
| 6829 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then | |
| 6830 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation | |
| 6831 Commands}. | |
| 6832 | |
| 6833 @item | |
| 6834 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my | |
| 6835 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s | |
| 6836 function definition is void. What's wrong?} | |
| 6837 | |
| 6838 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs | |
| 6839 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most | |
| 6840 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the | |
| 6841 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it | |
| 6842 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply | |
| 6843 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly: | |
| 6844 | |
| 6845 @example | |
| 6846 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0))) | |
| 6847 @end example | |
| 6848 | |
| 6849 @item | |
| 6850 @cindex open paren in column zero | |
| 6851 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or | |
| 6852 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or | |
| 6853 indentation to go haywire. What gives?} | |
| 6854 | |
| 6855 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always | |
| 6856 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any | |
| 6857 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages). | |
| 6858 @ifset XEMACS | |
| 6859 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details. | |
| 6860 @end ifset | |
| 6861 @ifclear XEMACS | |
| 6862 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details | |
| 6863 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual). | |
| 6864 @end ifclear | |
| 6865 | |
| 6866 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in | |
| 6867 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs | |
| 6868 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable | |
| 6869 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so | |
| 6870 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks. | |
| 6871 | |
| 6872 @end itemize | |
| 6873 | |
| 6874 | |
| 6875 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6876 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top | |
| 6877 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6878 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release | |
| 6879 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6880 | |
| 6881 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and | |
| 6882 of XEmacs since 19.16. | |
| 6883 | |
| 6884 @cindex web site | |
| 6885 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen | |
| 6886 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the | |
| 6887 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen | |
| 6888 compatibility, etc. are all available on the web site: | |
| 6889 | |
| 6890 @quotation | |
| 6891 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} | |
| 6892 @end quotation | |
| 6893 | |
| 6894 | |
| 6895 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6896 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top | |
| 6897 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6898 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports | |
| 6899 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6900 | |
| 6901 @kindex C-c C-b | |
| 6902 @findex c-submit-bug-report | |
| 6903 @findex submit-bug-report (c-) | |
| 6904 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to | |
| 6905 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information | |
| 6906 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise, | |
| 6907 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to | |
| 6908 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include | |
| 6909 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure | |
| 6910 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if | |
| 6911 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it. | |
| 6912 | |
| 6913 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any | |
| 6914 customizations loaded (i.e. start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file} | |
| 6915 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused | |
| 6916 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site | |
| 6917 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the | |
| 6918 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report. | |
| 6919 | |
| 6920 @cindex bug report mailing list | |
| 6921 Bug reports should be sent to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can | |
| 6922 also send other questions and suggestions (kudos? @t{;-)} to that | |
| 6923 address. It's a mailing list which you can join or browse an archive | |
| 6924 of; see the web site at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for | |
| 6925 further details. | |
| 6926 | |
| 6927 @cindex announcement mailing list | |
| 6928 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the | |
| 6929 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to | |
| 6930 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible | |
| 6931 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted | |
| 6932 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs}, | |
| 6933 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++}, | |
| 6934 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools}, | |
| 6935 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}. | |
| 6936 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-( | |
| 6937 | |
| 6938 | |
| 6939 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top | |
| 6940 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License | |
| 6941 @include doclicense.texi | |
| 6942 | |
| 6943 | |
| 6944 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27. | |
| 6945 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6946 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top | |
| 6947 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6948 @unnumbered Command and Function Index | |
| 6949 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6950 | |
| 6951 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string | |
| 6952 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its | |
| 6953 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name. | |
| 6954 @iftex | |
| 6955 @sp 2 | |
| 6956 @end iftex | |
| 6957 @printindex fn | |
| 6958 | |
| 6959 | |
| 6960 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6961 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top | |
| 6962 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6963 @unnumbered Variable Index | |
| 6964 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6965 | |
| 6966 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string | |
| 6967 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its | |
| 6968 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name. | |
| 6969 @iftex | |
| 6970 @sp 2 | |
| 6971 @end iftex | |
| 6972 @printindex vr | |
| 6973 | |
| 6974 | |
| 6975 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6976 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top | |
| 6977 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6978 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index | |
| 6979 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6980 | |
| 6981 @printindex cp | |
| 6982 | |
| 6983 | |
| 6984 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6985 @comment Epilogue. | |
| 6986 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6987 | |
| 6988 @iftex | |
| 6989 @page | |
| 6990 @summarycontents | |
| 6991 @contents | |
| 6992 @end iftex | |
| 6993 | |
| 6994 @bye | |
| 6995 | |
| 6996 @ignore | |
| 6997 arch-tag: c4cab162-5e57-4366-bdce-4a9db2fc97f0 | |
| 6998 @end ignore |
